Cisco Webex Board Guide

Add to my manuals
199 Pages

advertisement

Cisco Webex Board Guide | Manualzz

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.9

OCTOBER 2019

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator guide

for Cisco Webex Boards

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

1

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Thank you for choosing Cisco!

Your Cisco product has been designed to give you many years of safe, reliable operation.

This part of the product documentation is aimed at administrators working with the setup and configuration of the video conferencing device.

Our main objective with this Administrator guide is to address your goals and needs. Please let us know how well we succeeded!

May we recommend that you visit the Cisco web site regularly for updated versions of this guide.

The user documentation can be found on

►   https://www.cisco.com/go/board-docs

How to use this guide

The top menu bar and the entries in the Table of contents are all hyperlinks. You can click on them to go to the topic.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals

Administrator Guide

Appendices Maintenance Device settings

Table of contents

Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 4

User documentation and software ....................................................................................... 5

What’s new in CE9 ................................................................................................................ 6

Webex Boards at a glance .................................................................................................. 10

Power On and Off ................................................................................................................12

How to administer the video conferencing device ..............................................................13

Configuration .................................................................................................................. 17

User administration ............................................................................................................. 18

Change the device passphrase .......................................................................................... 19

Restrict the access to the Settings menu ........................................................................... 20

Device configuration ........................................................................................................... 21

Add a sign in banner ........................................................................................................... 22

Add a welcome banner ....................................................................................................... 23

Manage the service certificates of the device ................................................................... 24

Manage the lists of trusted certificate authorities - CAs .................................................... 25

Set up secure audit logging ................................................................................................ 29

Delete CUCM trust lists....................................................................................................... 30

Change the persistency mode............................................................................................ 31

Set strong security mode ................................................................................................... 32

Set up an SMTP email server ............................................................................................. 33

Set up ad hoc multipoint conferences ................................................................................ 34

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing .................................................................. 36

Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio ..............................................................................41

Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface ................................. 43

Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume ................................................................ 45

Manage the Favorites list .................................................................................................... 46

Set up accessibility features ............................................................................................... 47

Provisioning of product specific configurations from CUCM .............................................. 48

Peripherals ...................................................................................................................... 50

Connect an input source......................................................................................................51

Information about 4K resolution .......................................................................................... 53

Information about HDMI cables ........................................................................................... 54

Set up the Best overview feature ....................................................................................... 55

Connect the Touch 10 controller ........................................................................................ 56

Connect the ISDN Link ........................................................................................................ 59

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

2

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 60

Upgrade the device software ............................................................................................. 61

Add option keys .................................................................................................................. 62

Device status ...................................................................................................................... 63

Run diagnostics ................................................................................................................... 64

Download log files ............................................................................................................... 65

Access the Technical support screen ................................................................................ 66

Create a remote support user ............................................................................................ 67

Backup and restore configurations and custom elements ................................................. 68

CUCM provisioning of custom elements ............................................................................ 69

TMS provisioning of custom elements ................................................................................ 70

Revert to the previously used software image ................................................................... 71

Factory reset the video conferencing device ..................................................................... 72

Factory reset Cisco Touch 10 ............................................................................................. 75

Factory reset Cisco TelePresence Touch 10 ...................................................................... 76

Capture user interface screenshots ................................................................................... 77

Device settings ............................................................................................................... 78

Overview of the device settings ......................................................................................... 79

Audio settings ..................................................................................................................... 84

BYOD settings ..................................................................................................................... 86

CallHistory settings ............................................................................................................. 87

Cameras settings ................................................................................................................ 88

Conference settings ........................................................................................................... 90

FacilityService settings ....................................................................................................... 95

H323 settings ...................................................................................................................... 96

HttpClient settings .............................................................................................................. 99

HttpFeedback settings ...................................................................................................... 100

Logging settings ................................................................................................................101

Macros settings ................................................................................................................ 103

Network settings ............................................................................................................... 104

NetworkServices settings ..................................................................................................112

Peripherals settings ...........................................................................................................121

Phonebook settings .......................................................................................................... 122

Provisioning settings ..........................................................................................................124

Proximity settings...............................................................................................................127

RoomAnalytics settings .................................................................................................... 128

RoomReset settings .......................................................................................................... 129

RTP settings ...................................................................................................................... 130

Security settings ................................................................................................................131

SerialPort settings ............................................................................................................. 134

SIP settings ....................................................................................................................... 135

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

3

Administrator Guide

Appendices Maintenance Device settings

Standby settings ............................................................................................................... 140

SystemUnit settings ...........................................................................................................142

Time settings .................................................................................................................... 143

UserInterface settings ....................................................................................................... 146

UserManagement settings .................................................................................................151

Video settings ................................................................................................................... 153

WebEngine settings .......................................................................................................... 160

Experimental settings ........................................................................................................161

Appendices ................................................................................................................... 162

How to use the Webex Board ........................................................................................... 163

How to use Touch 10 ........................................................................................................ 164

Set up remote monitoring ................................................................................................. 165

Access call information and answer a call while using the web interface ........................ 166

Place a call using the web interface ................................................................................. 167

Share content using the web interface ............................................................................. 169

Control a far end camera ...................................................................................................170

Packet loss resilience - ClearPath .....................................................................................171

Room analytics ...................................................................................................................172

Customize the video conferencing device's user interface ...............................................174

Customize the video conferencing device's behavior using macros ...............................176

Remove default buttons from the user interface .............................................................. 177

Sending HTTP(S) requests ...............................................................................................178

Digital signage ....................................................................................................................179

Web apps .......................................................................................................................... 180

API-driven web views ........................................................................................................181

Presentation source composition ..................................................................................... 182

Manage startup scripts ..................................................................................................... 184

Access the device’s XML files ......................................................................................... 185

Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface ............................... 186

Connector panel ............................................................................................................... 187

About Ethernet ports ......................................................................................................... 188

Mini-jack connector pin-out schemes .............................................................................. 189

Serial interface for maintenance for Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S ........................... 190

Serial interface for maintenance for Webex Board 55 and 70 ..........................................191

Open TCP Ports ................................................................................................................ 192

HTTPFeedback address from TMS................................................................................... 193

Register a device to the Cisco Webex cloud service ....................................................... 194

Supported RFCs ............................................................................................................... 195

Technical specification ...................................................................................................... 196

User documentation on the Cisco web site ...................................................................... 198

Cisco contacts .................................................................................................................. 199

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Chapter 1

Introduction

4 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

User documentation and software

Products covered in this guide

• Cisco Webex Board 55/55S

• Cisco Webex Board 70/70S

• Cisco Webex Board 85S

User documentation

This guide provides you with the information required to administrate the video conferencing device.

The guide primarily addresses capabilities and configurations of on-premise registered devices (CUCM,

VCS), but a sub-set of the capabilities and configurations also applies to devices that are registered to our cloud service (Cisco Webex).

Refer to the

►   User documentation on the Cisco web site

appendix for more information about the guides for this product.

Documentation on the Cisco web site

Visit the Cisco web site regularly for updated versions of the guides:

  https://www.cisco.com/go/board-docs

Documentation for cloud registered devices

For more information about devices that are registered to the Cisco Webex cloud service, visit:

  https://help.webex.com

Cisco Project Workplace

Explore the Cisco Project Workplace to find inspiration and guidelines when preparing an office or meeting room for video conferencing:

  https://www.cisco.com/go/projectworkplace

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Software

Download software for the endpoint from the Cisco web site:

  https://software.cisco.com/download/home

We recommend reading the Software release notes

(CE9):

  https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/ collaboration-endpoints/spark-board/tsd-productssupport-series-home.html

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

5

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration

What’s new in CE9

This chapter provides an overview of the new and changed device settings (configurations), and the new features and improvements in the current Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.x

(CE9.x) compared to CE9.8.

The following Webex products are new in CE9:

• CE9.0 - Room Kit

• CE9.1 - Codec Plus, and Room 55

• CE9.2 - Room 70

• CE9.4 - Codec Pro, Room 70 G2, and Room 55 Dual

• CE9.6 - Room Kit Mini

• CE9.8 - Board 55/55S, Board 70/70S, and Board 85S

For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:

►   https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaborationendpoints/spark-board/tsd-products-support-series-home.html

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

New features and improvements in CE9.9

Updates to the UI Extensions editor

(All products)

The In-room control editor has been renamed to UI

Extensions editor to reflect the additional features that are available. You can launch the editor by going to

Integration > UI Extension Editor on the web interface.

In addition, the editor’s UI has been updated.

For more information, see the Customization guide for CE9.9 at  https://www.cisco.com/go/in-roomcontrol-docs

Web apps

(Boards)

You can use the UI Extensions editor to create web apps. This way you can access apps such as Jira,

Miro, Office 365, and Google docs directly from a board.

Fetch branding images and custom wallpaper from an external URL

(All products)

You can use the

xCommand UserInterface Branding

Fetch

API command to download branding images or a custom wallpaper from an external URL.

Custom wallpaper is not available for Webex Boards.

Changes to the Network Settings menu

(All products)

The Network connection page on the device’s user interface has changed. First you see an overview of the current network set-up, then you can open the

Ethernet or Wi-Fi settings if you want to change them.

A few settings, which were not available from the GUI before, are now added.

Digital signage

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room

55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)

Digital signage allows you to display custom content, such as company news, building maps, or emergency information, when the device is in half-wake mode.

Users can interact with the signage content only on

Webex Boards.

Changes to the ultrasound settings

(All products)

All products now has the same default value for the

Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume setting. Also the volume range is aligned between the different products.

Product specific differences are handled internally and no longer reflected in the range of values and the default value. We have not made any changes to the sound level that is played out from a device.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

6

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

TLS configuration changes

(All products)

For security reasons we have made some changes to the TLS configuration on HTTPS client, syslog, and SIP connections:

• You must explicitly turn off certificate verification if you don’t want to perform a certificate check. By default, certificates are checked on all TLS connections.

• The minimum TLS version is increased from version

1.0 to 1.1 (exceptions for CUCM and SIP, which still allow version 1.0). Also note that the Webex cloud is using TLS version 1.2.

• You can configure certificate verification for provisioning, phone book, and other HTTP servers separately. The former NetworkServices HTTPS

VerifyServerCertificate setting, which covered all these server types, are replaced by three settings:

Provisioning TLSVerify , Phonebook Server [1] TlsVerify , and HTTPFeedback TlsVerify .

• You can configure certificate verification for external logging (both audit logging and regular logging).

• For SIP, the certificates are verified against the

Custom CA list , which is uploaded to the device manually using the web interface or API. For other connections, the certificates are verified against either the Pre-installed CA list on the device, or the Custom

CA list .

Updates to whiteboarding and annotations

(Boards)

• Create, edit, and move stickies on your whiteboard and annotations.

• Choose between three different pen sizes when whiteboarding and annotating.

• Create copies of whiteboards and annotations. The whiteboard or annotated snapshot of a presentation is stored in the Whiteboard menu. You can go back to it and continue work on the copy as you would on any other whiteboard or snapshot.

Wired touch redirect

(Boards)

Touch redirect enables you to control your laptop from a

Webex Board screen. You must connect the laptop to the

Webex Board with an HDMI cable (wired sharing) and a

USB-C cable.

Touch redirect only works outside of call.

This feature is only available on the second generation of boards (Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S).

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

7 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Configuration changes in CE9.9

New configurations

Audio Input ARC [1] Mode

(Codec Plus)

Audio Input HDMI [2..3] Level (Room 55D, Room 70)

Audio Input HDMI [2..3] Mode

(Room 55D, Room 70)

Audio Input HDMI [2..3] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo

(Room 55D, Room 70)

BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled

(Boards)

Not available in CE9.9.0.

HttpFeedback TlsVerify

(All products)

Logging External TlsVerify

(All products)

Phonebook Server [1] TlsVerify

(All products)

Provisioning TlsVerify (All products)

Standby Signage Audio

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room

70 G2, Boards)

Standby Signage InteractionMode

(Boards)

Standby Signage Mode

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room

70 G2, Boards)

Standby Signage RefreshInterval

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,

Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)

Standby Signage Url

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70

G2, Boards)

UserInterface WebcamOnlyMode (Room Kit Mini)

WebEngine Mode

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2,

Boards)

WebEngine RemoteDebugging

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room

70, Room 70 G2, Boards)

Configurations that are removed

NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate

(All products)

Replaced by:

• HttpFeedback TlsVerify

• Phonebook Server [1] TlsVerify

• Provisioning TlsVerify

Configurations that are modified

Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume

(All products)

The valuespace and default value has changed for many products. Product specific differences are now handled internally and not reflected in the default value and range of possible values.

NEW valuespace: Integer (0..90) (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, SX80, SX20)

NEW valuespace: Integer (0..70)

(Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2,

Boards, SX10, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)

NEW default value: 70

(All products)

RTP Ports Range Stop

(All products)

OLD: Default: 2486

NEW: Default: 2487

OLD: Integer (1120..65535)

NEW: Integer (1121..65535)

SIP ListenPort

(All products)

OLD: Off/On

NEW: Auto/Off/On

SIP ListenPort

(Boards)

OLD: Default: On

NEW: Default: Auto

SIP TlsVerify

(All products)

OLD: Default: Off

NEW: Default: On

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

8

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals

Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55,

Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX80, SX20, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)

OLD: Integer (-100..100)

NEW: String (1, 12)

Video Output Connector [n] Location VerticalOffset

(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55, Room

55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX80, SX20, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)

OLD: Integer (-100..100)

NEW: String (1, 12)

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

9 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration

Webex Boards at a glance

(page 1 of 2)

The Webex Board includes a 4K camera, a capacitive touch interface, built-in microphones and speakers that integrate with a high-resolution 4K screen. The Webex Board is a powerful audio and video conferencing device, but can also be used as a wireless presentation screen and a digital whiteboard. The Webex Board helps teams collaborate in physical meeting rooms, but also securely connects to virtual meeting spaces to facilitate a continuous workflow.

The Webex Board is available in three different screen sizes:

• Webex Board 55 and 55S with a 55" LED screen.

Designed for huddle and small spaces up to 5 people.

• Webex Board 70 and 70S with a 70" LED screen.

Designed for small to large meetings rooms up to 8 people.

• Webex Board 85S with a 85" LED screen. Designed for larger collaboration spaces such as auditoriums, training spaces, and classrooms.

The second generation of Webex Boards is referred to as the S Series , representing some minor optimizations to the hardware platform.

You can find more information about the Cisco Webex Board at ►  https://www.cisco.com/go/webexboard

Features and benefits

• Easy sharing: Wired or wireless content sharing.

• Digital whiteboard: Whiteboard-function that lets you automatically save whiteboards to a Cisco Webex

Teams space or send them by email. Possibility to annotate on screen share.

• Audio: Built-in microphones with intelligent voice tracking. Integrated voice optimized speakers providing high-fidelity audio conferencing.

• Best overview: Fixed-lens camera capturing virtually the entire room.

Peripherals Maintenance

• Speaker tracking: Detects and switches between active speakers, providing ideal framing.

• High resolution: Powerful 4K camera captures highresolution image.

• Continuous workflow: Work can continue from a different location with the Webex Teams app, or from a device, such as another Webex Board.

• Intuitive navigation: Touch capability, simple meetingjoin experience with one button to push (OBTP).

• Security: End to end security.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

• Flexible registration: Can register on premises or to the cloud through Cisco Webex. The hardware is optimized to run on a cloud platform, for great experiences in shared room and spaces with easy access to host conferences.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

10

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration

Webex Boards at a glance

(page 2 of 2)

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Mounting options

4K camera

Microphone array

LCD touchscreen (4K resolution)

• Board 55/55S: 55"

• Board 70/70S: 70"

• Board 85S: 85"

Floor stand

Home button

Connector panel (at rear)

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

11

Loudspeakers

Wall stand

Pen/Stylus

Wall mount www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration

Power On and Off

Restart and standby using the user interface

Restart the device

1. Select the device name or address at the top of the user interface.

2. Select Settings , followed by Restart .

3. Select Restart again to confirm your choice.

Enter standby mode

1. Select the device name or address at the top of the user interface.

2. Select Standby .

Exit standby mode

• Tap the screen of the Touch controller or the board.

Enter halfwake mode and clean up for the next user

• Press and hold for a few seconds the Home button on the board.

Exit halfwake mode

• Tap the Home button, the screen of the Touch controller, or the board itself.

Peripherals Maintenance

Power Off or restart the device remotely

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

Restart .

Restart the device

Click Restart device...

and confirm your choice.

It takes a few minutes before the device is ready for use.

Power Off the device

Click Shutdown device...

and confirm your choice.

You cannot power the device on again remotely.

For the device to power up, you have to disconnect the power plug and connect it again.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

12 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

How to administer the video conferencing device

(page 1 of 4)

In general, we recommend you to use the web interface to administer and maintain the device, as described in this administrator guide.

Alternatively, you can access the API of the device by other methods:

• HTTP/HTTPS (also used by the web interface)

• WebSocket

• SSH

• Serial connection

If you want more information about the different access methods, and how to use the API, refer to the API guide for the device.

Tip

If the configuration or status is available in the API, the web interface setting or status translates into an API configuration or status as follows:

Set X > Y > Z to Value (web) is the same as

xConfiguration X Y Z: Value

(API)

Check X > Y > Z status (web) is the same as

xStatus X Y Z

(API)

For example:

Set SystemUnit > Name to MySystem is the same as

xConfiguration SystemUnit Name: MySystem

Check SystemUnit > Software > Version status is the same as

xStatus SystemUnit Software Version

More settings and statuses are available in the web interface than in the API.

Access method

HTTP/HTTPS

WebSocket

SSH

Serial connection

Notes

• Used by the web interface of the device

• Non-secure (HTTP) or secure (HTTPS) communication

• HTTPS: Enabled by default

• HTTP: Enabled by default only for devices that have been upgraded to CE9.4 (or later) from an earlier software version, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade

• Tied to HTTP, so that also HTTP or HTTPS must be enabled before you can use WebSocket

• Encrypted (wss) or unencrypted (ws) communication

• Disabled by default

• Secure TCP/IP connection

• Enabled by default

• Connect to the device with a cable. IP-address, DNS, or

• a network is not required

Enabled by default

• For security reasons, you are asked to sign in by default

( SerialPort > LoginRequired ) *

How to enable/disable the methods

NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode

Restart the device for changes to take effect

NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode

NetworkServices > Websocket

Restart the device for changes to take effect

NetworkServices > SSH > Mode

You do not need to restart the device.

It may take some time for changes to take effect

SerialPort > Mode

Restart the device for changes to take effect

* The SerialPort > LoginRequired setting is on only available on Board 55S, 70S, and 85S. You always have to sign in on the Board 55 and 70.

If all access methods are disabled (set to Off ), you can no longer configure the device. You are not able to re-enable

(set to On ) any of the access methods, and you must factory reset the device to recover.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

13

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

How to administer the video conferencing device (page 2 of 4)

The web interface of the device

The web interface is the administration portal for the device. You can connect from a computer and administer the device remotely. It provides full configuration access and offers tools and mechanisms for maintenance.

Note: The web interface requires that HTTP or HTTPS is enabled (refer to NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode setting).

We recommend that you use the latest release of one of the major web browsers.

Connect to the device

Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the address bar.

How to find the IP address

1. Select the device name or address at the top of the user interface.

2. Select Settings , followed by About this device .

Sign in

Enter user name and passphrase for the endpoint and click Sign In .

The device is delivered with a default user named admin with no passphrase. Leave the

Passphrase field blank when signing in for the first time.

It is mandatory to set a password for the admin user.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Sign out

Hover the mouse over the user name and choose Signout from the drop-down list. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

14

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration

How to administer the video conferencing device (page 3 of 4)

How the web interface is organized

The web interface is organized in sub-pages. All sub-pages shown below are available if the device is registerd to an onpremise service (CUCM, VCS); the pages shown in grey color are not available if the device is registered to the Cisco cloud service

(Cisco Webex).

In both cases, a user that is signed in, sees only the pages that he has access rights for.

Read more about user administration, user roles and access rights in the

► User administration chapter.

Main menu

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Home Call Control

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Setup

Configuration

Status

Peripherals

Personalization

Favorites

Email Settings

15

Security

Users

Service Certificates

CUCM Certificates

Certificate Authorities

Strong Security Mode

Sign In Banner

Non-persistent Mode

Maintenance

Diagnostics

System Logs

Call Logs

User Interface Screenshots

Software Upgrade

Option Keys

Backup and Restore

System Recovery

Restart

Integration

UI Extensions Editor

Macro Editor

Startup Scripts

Developer API www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

How to administer the video conferencing device (page 4 of 4)

Settings and device information on the user interface

You have access to device information, and some basic configurations and device tests on the device’s user interface.

Device-critical settings and functions, such as network settings, service activation, and factory reset, may be protected by a passphrase, refer to the

►  Restrict the access to the Settings menu

chapter.

Some of the settings and tests are also part of the Setup assistant that is launched when the device is powered up for the first time.

The Setup assistant is described in the Getting Started Guide for devices running CE software.

Access Settings

1. Select the device name or address at the top of the user interface.

2. Select Settings .

A padlock symbol indicates that a setting is protected

(locked down).

3. Select the setting you want to change, or the test you want to run.

If a setting is locked down, an authentication window pops up, and you have to sign in with ADMIN credentials to proceed.

In this context, the board and the Touch controller operate independently. If you unlock the settings by signing in on one of them, it has no effect on the other.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

16 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Chapter 2

Configuration

17 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

User administration

You have to sign in to get access to the web and command line interfaces. You can assign different roles to users, to determine what they should have access to.

The default user account

The device comes with a default administrator user account with full access rights. The user name is admin and no passphrase is initially set.

It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the admin user.

Read how to set the passphrase in the ►   Change the device passphrase

chapter.

Create a new user account

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Users .

2. Click Add new user...

.

3. Fill in the Username , Passphrase and Repeat passphrase input fields.

As a default, the user has to change the passphrase when he signs in for the first time.

Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished Name) field only if you use client certificates for authentication.

4. Check the appropriate Roles check boxes.

If you assign the ADMIN role to a user, enter your own passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.

5. Set the Status to Active to activate the user.

6. Click Create User .

Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Edit an existing user account

If you make changes to a user that holds the Admin role, you must always enter your own passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.

Change the user privileges

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to

Security > Users .

2. Click the appropriate user in the list.

3. Choose user roles, set the status to Acitve or

Inactive , and decide if the user has to change the passphrase on the next sign in.

Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished

Name) field only if you use certificate login on

HTTPS.

4. Click Edit User to save the changes.

Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.

Change the passphrase

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Users .

2. Click the appropriate user in the list.

3. Enter the new passphrase in the appropriate input fields.

4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.

Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.

Delete the user account

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Users .

2. Click the appropriate user in the list.

3. Click Delete user...

and confirm when prompted.

18

User roles

A user account may hold one or a combination of user roles . A user account with full access rights, like the default admin user, should possess the ADMIN,

USER and AUDIT roles.

These are the user roles :

ADMIN: A user with this role can create new users, change most settings, make calls, and search the contact lists. The user cannot upload audit certificates and change the security audit settings.

USER: A user with this role can make calls and search the contact lists. The user can modify a few settings, for example adjust the ringtone volume and set the time and date format.

AUDIT: A user with this role can change the security audit settings and upload audit certificates.

ROOMCONTROL: A user with this role can create customized UI panels (for example in-room controls). The user has access to the UI Extensions editor and corresponding development tools.

INTEGRATOR: A user with this role has access to settings, commands and status that are required to set up advanced AV scenarios, and to integrate our devices with 3 rd party equipment. Such a user can also create customized UI panels.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Change the device passphrase

You need to know the device passphrase in order to:

• Sign in to the web interface

• Sign in and use the command line interfaces

The default user account

The device is delivered with a default user account with full access rights. The user name is admin , and initially, no passphrase is set.

It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the default admin user in order to restrict access to device configuration. It is also mandatory to set a passphrase for any other user with ADMIN rights.

A warning, saying that the device passphrase is not set, is shown on screen until a passphrase is set for the admin user.

Other user accounts

You can create many user accounts for the device.

Read more about how to create and manage user accounts in the

► User administration

chapter.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Change your passphrase

1. Sign in to the web interface, hover the mouse over the user name, and choose Change Passphrase in the drop down list.

2. Enter the current passphrase and new passphrase in the input fields, and click Change passphrase .

The passphrase format is a string with 0–64 characters.

If the passphrase currently is not set, leave the Current passphrase field blank.

Change another user’s passphrase

If you have administrator access rights, you can change the password of any user.

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Users .

2. Click the appropriate user in the list.

3. Enter the new passphrase in the Passphrase and Repeat passphrase input fields.

If the user holds the Admin role, you must enter your own passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.

4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.

Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

19

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Restrict the access to the Settings menu

By default, any user has access to the Settings menu on the user interface (both on the board and the Touch controller).

We recommend that you restrict the access to prevent unauthorized users from changing the configuration of the device.

The Settings menu on the user interface

If the menu is locked down, you must sign in to access the device-critical settings.

Select the device name or address at the top of the user interface followed by Settings , in order to open the Settings menu.

Lock down the Settings menu

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to

Setup > Configuration .

2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode , and select

Locked .

3. Click Save for the change to take effect.

Now a user has to sign in with ADMIN credentials to get access to the device-critical settings on the user interface

(board and Touch controller).

Unlock the Settings menu

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to

Setup > Configuration .

2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode , and select

Unlocked .

3. Click Save for the change to take effect.

Now any user has access to the complete Settings menu on the user interface (board and Touch controller).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Locked down settings

Locked down settings are marked with a padlock.

20

Unlock settings

If you click on the padlock, you are asked to sign in with an ADMIN user.

Once signed in, you can access all settings until you close the Settings menu.

In this context, the board and the Touch controller operate independently. If you unlock the settings by signing in on one of them, it has no effect on the other.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Device configuration

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration .

Find a device setting

Search for settings

Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All settings that contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Settings that have these letters in their value space are also shown.

Peripherals Maintenance

Change a device setting

Check the value space

A settings’s value space is specified either by text following the input field or in a drop-down list that opens when you click the arrow.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About device settings

All device settings can be changed from the web interface.

Each device setting is described in the  

►   Device settings

chapter.

Different settings may require different user credentials. In order to be sure that an administrator is able to change all device settings, an administrator user must possess all user roles.

You can read more about user administration and user roles in the

► User administration chapter.

Select a category and navigate to settings

The device settings are grouped in categories. Choose a category in the left pane to show the associated settings.

Change a value

1. Choose the preferred value from the drop-down list, or enter new text in the input field.

2. Click Save for the change to take effect.

Use the Undo or Revert buttons if you do not want to make any changes.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Categories with unsaved changes are marked with an edit symbol ( ).

21 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Add a sign in banner

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Sign In Banner .

1. Enter the message that you want to present to the user when he signs in.

2. Click Save to activate the banner.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About sign in banner

If a device administrator wants to provide initial information to all users, he can create a sign in banner. The message is shown when the user signs in to the web interface or the command line interface.

The maximum size is: 4 kByte

Welcome banner versus sign in banner

Sign in banner:

• The banner is shown before the user signs in to the web interface or the command line interface.

Welcome banner:

• The banner is shown after the user has signed in to the web interface or the command line interface.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

22 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Add a welcome banner

Adding a Welcome banner is only available using API commands; we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.

API commands xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set

This is a multiline command. Anything you input after you issue the command, is input to the command (including line breaks).

Finish the input with a separate line containing just a period ending with a line break.

There are also a few more welcome banner commands, refer to the API-guide for more details.

xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Clear xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Get

Example xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set <enter>

This is a welcome banner. <enter>

A welcome banner may have multiple lines. <enter>

. <enter>

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

This is a sign in banner

About welcome banner

You can set up a welcome banner that users see after they sign in to the device's web interface or command line interface. The banner can have multiple lines.

The banner can for example contain information you need in order to get started, or things you must be aware of when setting up the device.

The maximum size is: 4 kByte

Welcome banner versus sign in banner

Sign in banner:

• The banner is shown before the user signs in to the web interface or the command line interface.

Welcome banner:

• The banner is shown after the user has signed in to the web interface or the command line interface.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

23 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance

Manage the service certificates of the device

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Service

Certificates .

You need the following files:

• Certificate (file format: .PEM)

• Private key, either as a separate file or included in the same file as the certificate (file format: .PEM format)

• Passphrase (required only if the private key is encrypted)

The certificate and the private key will be stored in the same file on the device.

Device settings

Enable or disable, view or delete a certificate

Use the On and Off buttons to enable or disable a certificate for the different services.

Use the corresponding button to view or delete a certificate.

Add a certificate

1. Browse to find the Certificate file and Private key file (optional) on your computer.

2. Fill in the Passphrase if required.

3. Click Add certificate...

to store the certificate on the device.

Only certificates with a validity period of up to 10 years are accepted.

The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your device has other certificates.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About the service certificates of the device

Certificate validation may be required when using TLS (Transport Layer

Security).

A server or client may require that the device presents a valid certificate to them before communication can be set up.

The device’s certificates are text files that verify the authenticity of the device.

These certificates may be issued by a certificate authority (CA).

Certificates are used for the following services: HTTPS server, SIP, IEEE 802.1X and audit logging.

You can store many certificates on the device, but only one certificate can be enabled for each service at a time.

If authentication fails, the connection will not be established.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

24

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Manage the lists of trusted certificate authorities - CAs

(page 1 of 4)

Certificate validation may be required when using TLS (Transport

Layer Security).

You can configure the device to demand that a server or client presents its certificate before communication is set up. The device uses the certificate to verify the authenticity of the server or client. If authentication fails, the connection will not be established.

The certificate (text file) must be signed by a trusted Certificate

Authority (CA). Lists of certificates from trusted CAs reside on the device.

The CA certificate lists

You can check and maintain the lists of trusted CAs from the web interface of the device:

• Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate

Authorities . There is one tab for each CA list.

These are the CA lists:

• Preinstalled : Pre-installed CA certificates that are used to validate the certificates of external servers (HTTPS, syslog and SMTP) that the device communicates with.

• Collaboration Edge : Pre-installed CA certificates that are used to validate the certificates of servers contacted over the Internet when the device is provisioned by Cisco Unified

Communications Manager (CUCM) via Expressway (also known as MRA or Edge).

• Custom : CA certificates that you have uploaded to the device yourself. The list must include all CAs that are needed in order to verify certificates for both logging and other connections, if those certificates are not already included in the pre-installed lists.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

25 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals

Manage the lists of trusted certificate authorities - CAs (page 2 of 4)

Manage pre-installed CA certificates for external servers

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate

Authorities , and open the Preinstalled tab.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Pre-installed CA certificates

A list of commonly used CA certificates is pre-installed on the device. The device uses this list when validating certificates from external servers that it communicates with:

• HTTP servers that host content used by the HttpClient API or macros

• Provisioning servers

• Phone book servers

• Syslog servers (for external logging)

• SMTP mail servers

• Servers and services used by the

Cisco Webex cloud

Factory resetting the device does not delete the list of pre-installed certificates.

View or disable certificates

Use the Details...

and Disable buttons respectively, to view or disable certificates.

The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your device has other certificates.

As an alternative to using the pre-installed certificates, you can append the certificates you need to the custom certificate list manually.

Refer to the ►

  Upload a CA certificate to the device

chapter how to update the list of trusted CA certificates.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

26

Cisco Webex Boards Administrator Guide

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Manage the lists of trusted certificate authorities - CAs (page 3 of 4)

Manage pre-installed CA certificates for CUCM via Expressway provisioning

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate

Authorities , and open the Collaboration Edge tab.

Appendices

Pre-installed CA certificates for CUCM via Expressway

The pre-installed CA certificates in this list are only used when the device is provisioned by Cisco Unified

Communications Manager (CUCM) via

Expressway (Edge).

Only Cisco Expressway infrastructure certificates are checked against this list.

If the validation of the Cisco Expressway infrastructure certificate fails, the device will not be provisioned and registered.

Factory resetting the device does not delete the list of pre-installed certificates.

View or disable certificates

Use the Details...

and Disable buttons respectively, to view or disable certificates.

The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your device has other certificates.

As an alternative to using the pre-installed certificates, you can append the certificates you need to the custom certificate list manually.

Refer to the ►

  Upload a CA certificate to the device

chapter how to update the list of trusted CA certificates.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

27

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance

Manage the lists of trusted certificate authorities - CAs (page 4 of 4)

Upload a CA certificate to the device

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate

Authorities , and open the Custom tab.

You need the following file:

• CA certificate list (file format: .PEM).

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

View or delete a certificate

Use the corresponding button to view or delete a certificate.

Upload a list of

CA certificates

1. Browse to find the file containing the CA certificates on your computer (file format:

.PEM).

2. Click Add certificate authority...

to store the new CA certificates on the device.

The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your device has other certificates.

Previously stored certificates are not deleted automatically.

The entries in a new file with CA certificates are appended to the existing list.

About the custom list of trusted CA certificates

This list contains the CA certificates that you have uploaded to the device yourself.

They can be used to validate client and server certificates for both logging and other connections.

They can be used for:

• HTTP servers that host content used by the HttpClient API or macros

• Provisioning servers

• Phone book servers

• SIP servers

• Syslog servers (for external logging)

• SMTP mail servers

• Cisco Expressway infrastructure

• Servers and services used by the

Cisco Webex cloud

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

28

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Set up secure audit logging

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration .

Peripherals

1. Open the Security category.

2. Find the Audit > Server settings, and enter the

Address of the audit server.

If you set PortAssignment to

Manual , you must also enter a Port number for the audit server.

3. Set Audit > Logging > Mode to ExternalSecure .

4. Click Save for the change to take effect.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

The certificate authority (CA) that verifies the certificate of the audit server must be in the device’s list of trusted certificate authorities. Otherwise, logs will not be sent to the external server.

Refer to the ►   Upload a CA certificate to the device

chapter how to update the list.

About secure audit logging

When audit logging is enabled, all sign in activity and configuration changes on the device are recorded.

Use the Security > Audit > Logging >

Mode setting to enable audit logging.

Audit logging is disabled by default.

In ExternalSecure audit logging mode the device sends encrypted audit logs to an external audit server (syslog server), which identity must be verified by a signed certificate.

The signature of the audit server is verified using the list of pre-installed CA certificates or the custom CA list.

If the audit server authentication fails, no audit logs are sent to the external server.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

29 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Delete CUCM trust lists

The information in this chapter is only relevant for devices that are registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM).

Peripherals Maintenance

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security >

CUCM Certificates .

Delete the CUCM trust lists

Click Delete CTL/ITL to remove the trust lists.

As a general rule, you should not delete old CTL

(Certificate Trust List) and ITL (Initial Trust List) files.

In these cases, you must still delete them:

• When you change the CUCM IP address.

• When you move the endpoint between CUCM clusters.

• When you need to re-generate or change the CUCM certificate.

Overview of trust list fingerprints and certificates

The trust lists’ fingerprints and an overview of the certificates in the lists are displayed on the web page.

This information may be useful for troubleshooting.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

More information about trust lists

For more information about CUCM and trust lists, read the Deployment guide for

TelePresence endpoints on CUCM that is available on the Cisco web site.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

30 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Change the persistency mode

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security >

Non-persistent Mode .

Check the persistency status

The active radio buttons show the current persistency status of the device.

Alternatively, you can navigate to Setup > Status , and then open the Security category to see the Persistency status.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Change the persistency settings

All persistency settings are set to Persistent by default. You only have to change these settings if you want to make them Nonpersistent .

1. Click the radio buttons to set the persistency for configurations, call history, internal logging, local phonebook

(local directory and favorites) and IP connectivity (DHCP) information.

2. Click Save and restart...

.

The device restarts automatically. After the restart, the behavior changes according to the new persistency settings.

Logs, configurations, and other data that was stored before you switched to Non-persistent mode, are NOT cleared or deleted.

31

Persistency mode

Configurations, call history, internal logs, local phonebook (local directory and favorites list), and IP connectivity information are stored by default.

Because all persistency settings are set to Persistent , a device restart does not delete this information.

Generally, we recommend you NOT to change the persistency settings. Only change to Non-persistent mode if you have to prevent users from being able to see or traceback to any logged information from the previous session

In Non-persistent mode, the following information is lost or cleared each time the device restarts:

• Device configuration changes

• Information about placed and reveived calls (call history)

• Internal log files

• Changes to the local contacts or favorites list

• All IP related information (DHCP) from the last session

Information that was stored before changing to Non-persistent mode is not automatically cleared or deleted. You must factory reset the device to delete such information.

There is more information about performing a factory reset in

the ►

Factory reset the video conferencing device

chapter.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Set strong security mode

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security >

Strong Security Mode .

Set strong security mode

Read carefully about the consequences of strong security mode before you continue.

1. If you want to use strong security mode, click

Enable Strong Security Mode...

. and confirm your choice in the dialog box that appears.

The device restarts automatically.

2. Change the passphrase when you are prompted. The new passphrase must meet the strict criteria as described.

How to change the device passphrase is

described in the ►

  Change the device passphrase

chapter.

Return to normal mode

Click Disable Strong Security Mode... in order to restore the device to normal mode. Confirm your choice in the dialog box that appears.

The device restarts automatically.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About strong security mode

Use strong security mode only when compliance with DoD JITC regulations is required.

Strong security mode sets very strict passphrase requirements, and requires all users to change their passphrase on the next sign in.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

32

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Set up an SMTP email server

By setting up an SMTP server connection, the users of the video conferencing device can share their whiteboards and annotations via email with people inside or outside your organization.

It is possible to set up the server manually, but we strongly recommend you to use the setup wizard. Then you can test the connection while setting it up, and you get guidance how to upload server certificates if needed.

Enable sharing via email

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration .

2. Go to NetworkServices > SMTP > Mode . Sharing via email is only allowed if Mode is On .

Peripherals Maintenance

Use the wizard to set up the server

recommended

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Email Settings .

2. Click Start Wizard...

and enter the server address, encryption method, and port number.

3. Click Test Connection...

.

If everything is fine, click OK to continue the wizard.

If certificates are missing, click Continue to uploading step and follow the wizard instructions to upload the required certificates to the device.

4. Enter the email address from where the whiteboards or annotations will be sent.

5. Fill in the username and password fields if the SMTP server requires authentication and the encryption method is TLS or

STARTTLS.

6. Select Verify and Save to finish the server setup wizard.

Provided that NetworkServices > SMTP > Mode is On , the device is now ready to send whiteboards and annotations by email.

Set up the server manually

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration .

2. Go to NetworkServices > SMTP and set the Server , Security

(encryption method), Port , From , Username , and Password settings.

3. If required, upload CA certificates to the device as described in the

► Upload a CA certificate to the device

chapter.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Encryption methods and certificates

You must choose an encryption method that the email server supports.

Both the TLS and STARTTLS encryption methods require a server certificate. The device doesn't allow connections where the certificate of the SMTP server cannot be validated. Ignoring the certificate check is not an option.

Most often the server certificate can be validated using the CA list that is preinstalled on the device. If not, you have to upload the required certificates to the device yourself. Certificates that you upload yourself are added to the list of

Custom certificates.

Read more about CA lists in the

► Manage the lists of trusted certificate authorities - CAs chapter.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

33

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Set up ad hoc multipoint conferences

(page 1 of 2)

There are several ways to expand a point-to-point video call (a call involving only two parties) into a multipoint conference with more participants.

Centralized conference infrastructure

Most solutions are based on a centralized conference infrastructure, i.e. an MCU (multipoint control unit) 1 .

Local conference resources - MultiSite

(not available for SX10, DX70, and DX80)

In a MultiSite scenario, one of the video devices has MCU functionality.

MCU

Video device

A

Video device

D

Video device

B

Video device

C

In this set-up video devices A, B, C and D participates in a 4-party conference. The MCU receives media streams from all the devices, processes the streams, and sends all media to the other participants.

Video device w/

MultiSite

A

Video device

B

Video device

D

Video device

C

In this set-up video devices A, B, C and D participates in a

4-party conference. Device A uses its MultiSite functionality and acts as an MCU. It receives media streams from all the devices, processes the streams, and sends all media to the other participants.

MultiSite is not part of the standard product delivery; you must buy an upgrade option to get the MultiSite option key installed on the device.

The maximum number of participants supported by MultiSite is:

• SX10, DX70, and DX80: No MultiSite support

• SX80, MX700, and MX800: Five participants (yourself included) plus one additional audio call

• Codec Pro, Room 70 G2: Five participants (yourself included)

• Other products: Four participants (yourself included)

1 MCU - multipoint control unit, also called video-conferencing gateway or bridge.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

34

Multipoint configuration

Use the Conference > Multipoint > Mode setting to decide how to handle multipoint conferences. This setting takes the following values:

• Auto

• CUCMMediaResourceGroupList

• MultiSite (not available for SX10,

DX70, DX80)

• Off (not available for SX10, DX70,

DX80)

The table on the next page explains the different conferencing options.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Set up ad hoc multipoint conferences

(page 2 of 2)

Conference

Multipoint Mode setting

MultiSite option key

Off

Auto

3

CUCM-

MediaResource-

GroupList

MultiSite 3

N/A

N/A

Yes

No

Yes

No

Remote device type 2

Add participant behavior

MCU

Video device

Video device

N/A

N/A

MCU

Video device

MCU

Video device

Direct Remote Add

Plus one audio

Consultative Add

Local Multisite

Plus one audio

Direct Remote Add

Local Multisite

4 without cascading

Direct Remote Add

Plus one audio

4

• If the MCU supports Add Participant , there is an Add button in the UI and you can call the next participant directly.

The new participant is added to the conference as soon as he accepts the call.

• If the MCU does not support Add Participant , there is no Add button in the UI.

• You can add one extra participant on audio-only.

• You cannot add more participants on video.

• Available only to CUCM registered devices, and the SIP Type setting must be Cisco .

• The conference is put on hold while calling a new participant. When the new particiant accepts the call you can merge the new call with the conference.

• Only the participant who added the first new participant to the conference can add more participants.

• There is an Add button in the UI, and you can call the next participant directly.

• You can keep adding participants until you reach the maximum number for the device.

• You can add one extra participant on audio-only.

• You cannot add more participants on video.

• If the MCU supports Add Participant , there is an Add button in the UI and you can call the next participant directly.

The new participant is added to the conference as soon as he accepts the call.

• If the MCU does not support Add Participant , there is no Add button in the UI.

• There is an Add button in the UI, and you can call the next participant directly.

• You can keep adding participants until you reach the maximum number for the device.

• Only the MultiSite host (which is now acting as an MCU) can add participants. This prevents cascaded conferences.

• If the MCU supports Add Participant , there is an Add button in the UI and you can call the next participant directly.

The new participant is added to the conference as soon as he accepts the call.

• If the MCU does not support Add Participant , there is no Add button in the UI.

• You can add one extra participant on audio-only (not supported for SX10, DX70, and DX80).

• You cannot add more participants on video.

2 The remote device type is sown in the Call [n] DeviceType status.

3 Not supported for SX10, DX70, and DX80.

4 We recommend setting Conference Multipoint Mode to Auto rather than to MultiSite in order to avoid cascaded conferences.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

35 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing

(page 1 of 5)

Cisco Proximity allows users to see, control, capture and share content directly on their own mobile devices (smartphone, tablet, or laptop), when the mobile device is close to a video conferencing device.

The mobile device can automatically pair with the video conferencing device when it comes within range of ultrasound transmitted by the video conferencing device.

Proximity services

Place calls and control the video conferencing device:

• Dial, mute, adjust volume, hang up

• Available on laptops (OS X and Windows), smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)

View shared content on a mobile device:

• View shared content, review previous slides, save selected slides

• Available on smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)

• For DX70 and DX80, this service is available only when in a call

Wireless share from a laptop:

• Share content without connecting a presentation cable

• Available on laptops (OS X and Windows)

The number of simultaneous Proximity connections depends on the type of video conferencing device. The client warns new users if the maximum number of connections has been reached.

Video conferencing device

Room Kit, Room Kit Mini

Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,

Room 70 G2

Codec Plus, Codec Pro

Board 55/55S, Board 70/70S, Board 85S

SX80

SX10, SX20

MX700, MX800

MX200 G2, MX300 G2

DX70, DX80

Maximum number of connections

30 / 7 *

30 / 7 *

30 / 7

30 / 7

10

7

10

7

3

*

*

* 30 connections when the View shared content on a mobile device service is disabled; 7 connections when this service is enabled.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Place calls and control the video conferencing device

36

View shared content on a mobile device

Wireless share from a mobile device www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing

(page 2 of 5)

Install a Cisco Proximity client

Where to find the clients

You can download the Cisco Proximity clients for smartphones and tablets (Android and iOS), and laptops (Windows and OS X) free of charge from ► https://proximity.cisco.com

Clients for smartphones and tablets are also available directly through Google Play (Android) and Apple App Store (iOS).

Supported operating systems

• iOS 7 and above

• Android 4.0 and above

• Mac OS X 10.9 and above

• Windows 7 and above

The tile based interface introduced with Windows 8 is not supported.

End-user license agreement

Read the end-user license agreement carefully,

► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/general/warranty/

English/EU1KEN_.html

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

37 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing

(page 3 of 5)

Ultrasound emission

Cisco video conferencing devices emit ultrasound as part of the

Proximity feature.

Use the Proximity > Mode setting to switch the Proximity feature - and thereby also ultrasound emission - On and Off.

Most people are exposed to ultrasound more or less daily in many environments, including industry, commercial applications and home appliances.

Even if airborne ultrasound may cause subjective effects for some individuals, it is very unlikely that any effects will occur for levels below 75 dB.

Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room Kit, Room

Kit Mini, Room Kit Plus, SX10N and MX Series:

• The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a distance of 50 cm or more from the loudspeaker.

DX70 and DX80:

• The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a distance of 20 cm or more from the loudspeaker.

Boards:

• The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a distance of 20 cm or more from the screen.

For Board 50 and 70 (not S Series ) the level can be slightly higher right below the screen due to the downward-facing loudspeakers.

Codec Plus, Codec Pro, SX10, SX20, and SX80:

• We cannot foresee the ultrasound sound pressure level on these video conferencing devices, because they emit ultrasound on third-party loudspeakers.

The volume control on the loudspeaker itself, and the Audio >

Ultrasound > MaxVolume setting affect the ultrasound sound pressure level; the volume control on the remote control or

Touch controller does not have any effect.

Headsets

DX70, DX80, and SX10N:

You can always use a headset with these devices because:

• DX70 and DX80 have dedicated headset outputs, on which we never emit ultrasound.

• SX10N plays ultrasound on the built-in loudspeakers.

Ultrasound is never emitted on the HDMI or audio outputs.

Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room 55 Dual, Room Kit Plus, Codec

Plus, Codec Pro, Boards, SX10, SX20, SX80, and MX Series:

• These devices are not designed for headset use.

• We strongly recommend you to switch off ultrasound emission if you use a headset with these video conferencing devices

(set Proximity > Mode to Off ). Then you cannot use the

Proximity feature.

• Since these devices don’t have dedicated headset outputs, we are not able to control the sound pressure level from the connected headsets.

Room 55, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini:

• You can always connect a headset to the USB output of these devices, because we don't emit ultrasound on this output.

• The audio line outputs (mini-jack) of the Room 55 and Room

Kit are not designed for headset use. We are not able to control the sound pressure level from a headset that is connected to one of these outputs..

If you connect a headset to an audio line output, we strongly recommend you to switch off ultrasound emission (set

Proximity > Mode to Off ). Then you cannot use the Proximity feature.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

38

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing

(page 4 of 5)

Enable Proximity services

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration .

2. Go to Proximity > Mode .

Check that Proximity is On (default), so that the video conferencing device sends ultrasound pairing messages.

Enable the services you want to allow. Only Wireless share from a desktop client is enabled by default.

In order to fully utilise the Proximity functionality, we recommend that you enable all services.

Place calls and control the video conferencing device:

• Go to Proximity > Services > CallControl and choose

Enabled .

View shared content on a mobile device:

• Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > ToClients and choose Enabled .

Wireless share from a desktop client:

• Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > FromClients and choose Enabled .

The Proximity indicator

You can see the Proximity indicator on the screen as long as at least one Proximity client is paired with the device.

The indicator doesn't disappear immediately when the last client unpairs. It may take a few minutes.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About Proximity

The Proximity feature is switched On by default.

When Proximity is switched On , the video conferencing device transmits ultrasound pairing messages.

The ultrasound pairing messages are received by nearby devices with Proximity clients, and triggers the authentication and authorization of the device.

Cisco recommends - for the best user experience - that Proximity always is switched On * .

In order to get full access to Proximity, the Proximity services ( Proximity >

Services > ...

) must be Enabled as well.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

39

* We recommend not to use a headset, if you have switched on Proximity (ultrasound).

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing

(page 5 of 5)

Room considerations

Room acoustics

• Rooms with hard surfaces may cause challenges due to severe audio reflections. Acoustical treatment of meeting rooms is always highly recommended for the best meeting experience as well as Intelligent Proximity performance.

• Cisco recommends only one video conferencing device with Intelligent Proximity enabled in a room. Otherwise, interference is likely to occur, which may lead to problems with device discovery and session maintenance.

About privacy

In the Cisco Privacy statement and the Cisco Proximity

Supplement you find information about data collection in the clients and privacy concerns that needs to be considered when deploying this feature in the organization. Refer to:

► https://www.cisco.com/web/siteassets/legal/privacy.html

Basic troubleshooting

Cannot detect devices with Proximity clients

• Some Windows laptops are not able to record sound in the ultrasound frequency range (20 kHz-22 kHz). This can be due to frequency limitations with the sound card, sound driver or the internal microphone of the particular device. Refer to the

Support forum for more information.

• Check Settings > Issues and diagnostics on the user interface, or Maintenance > Diagnostics on the web interface of the video conferencing device. If there are no ultrasound related

Issues listed ("Unable to verify the ultrasound signal"), ultrasound pairing messages are emitted by the video conferencing device as they should. Refer to the Proximity

Support forum for further assistance with the client detection issues.

Audio artifacts

• If you can hear audio artifacts, like humming or clipping noise, decrease the maximum ultrasound volume ( Audio >

Ultrasound > MaxVolume ).

Cannot share content from a laptop

• For content sharing to work, the video conferencing device and the laptop must be on the same network. For this reason

Proximity sharing might fail if your video conferencing device is connected to your company network via Expressway, and your laptop is connected via VPN (VPN client dependent).

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Additional resources

Cisco Proximity site:

► https://proximity.cisco.com

Support forum:

► https://www.cisco.com/go/proximitysupport

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

40 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals

Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio

(page 1 of 2)

Video input quality settings

When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off between high resolution (sharpness) and high frame rate (motion).

The Video Input Connector n Quality setting must be set to

Motion for the optimal definition settings to take any effect. With the video input quality set to Sharpness , the endpoint will transmit the highest resolution possible, regardless of frame rate.

Optimal definition profile

The optimal definition profile should reflect the lighting conditions in the video conferencing room and the quality of the camera

(video input source). The better the lighting conditions and the better the quality of the camera, the higher the profile should be used.

Generally, the Medium profile is recommended. However, if the lighting conditions are very good, we recommend that you test the endpoint on the various Optimal Definition Profile settings before deciding on a profile. The High profile may be set in order to increase the resolution for a given call rate.

Some typical resolutions used for different optimal definition profiles, call rates and transmit frame rates are shown in the tables on the next page. The resolution and frame rate must be supported by both the calling and called devices.

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration .

1. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > Quality and set the video quality parameter to Motion (skip this step for Connector 1

(integrated camera).

2. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >

Profile and choose the preferred optimal definition profile.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

41

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance

Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio

(page 2 of 2)

1472

1920

2560

3072

4000

6000

128

256

384

512

768

1152

Call rate

[kbps]

Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates

Normal

320×180@30

512×288@30

640×360@30

768x448@30

1024×576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1280x720@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920×1080@30

H.264, maximum 30 fps

Medium

320×180@30

640×360@30

768×448@30

1024x576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920×1080@30

High

512×288@30

768×448@30

768×448@30

1024x576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1920×1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920×1080@30

Normal

320×180@30

512×288@30

640×360@30

768x448@30

1024×576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1280x720@30

1280x720@60

1280x720@60

1280x720@60

1920×1080@60

H.264, maximum 60 fps

Medium

512×288@20

640×360@30

768×448@30

1024x576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1280x720@60

1280x720@60

1280x720@60

1920x1080@60

1920×1080@60

High

512×288@30

768×448@30

768×448@30

1024x576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@60

1280×720@60

1280x720@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920×1080@60

1472

1920

2560

3072

4000

6000

128

256

384

512

768

1152

Call rate

[kbps]

Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates

Normal

512×288@30

640×360@30

768×448@30

1024x576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920×1080@30

H.265, maximum 30 fps

Medium

512×288@30

768×448@30

1024×576@30

1280x720@30

1280×720@30

1920×1080@30

1920×1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920×1080@30

High

640×360@30

768×448@30

1280×720@30

1280x720@30

1920×1080@30

1920×1080@30

1920×1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920x1080@30

1920×1080@30

Normal

512×288@30

640×360@30

768×448@30

1024x576@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@60

1280x720@60

1280x720@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920×1080@60

H.265, maximum 60 fps

Medium

512×288@30

768×448@30

1024×576@30

1280x720@30

1280×720@30

1280×720@60

1280×720@60

1280x720@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920×1080@60

High

640×360@30

768×448@30

1280×720@30

1280x720@30

1280×720@60

1280×720@60

1280×720@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920x1080@60

1920×1080@60

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

42

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface

(page 1 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Personalization , and open the Branding tab.

From this page you can add your own branding elements

(background brand image, logo) to the video conferencing device.

Branding in the awake state

In the awake state you can:

• Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen and Touch 10)

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About Branding

The Branding feature, as describe in this chapter, allows you to customize the screen and Touch user interface appearence without compromising the overall Cisco user experience.

Logo

We recommend:

• A black logo (the device will add a white overlay with 40% opacity so that the logo and the other user interface elements go well together)

• PNG-format with transparent background

• Minimum 272×272 pixels (it will be scaled automatically)

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

43 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface

(page 2 of 2)

Branding in the halfwake state

In halfwake state you can:

• Add a background brand image (screen and

Touch 10)

• Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen and Touch 10)

• Customize or remove the message at the center of the screen (only on screen, not on Touch 10).

This is the message that informs the user how to start using the device

In general, we recommend that you keep the standard message. Change the message only if you have to adapt it to a different scenario, for example if you have a third-party user interface.

Background brand image

• When the device wakes up, the image is shown in full color; after a few seconds the image is automatically dimmed (transparent black overlay)

• Image format: PNG or JPEG

• Recommended size: 1920 × 1080 pixels

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Logo

We recommend:

• A white logo (so that it goes well with the dark background brand image)

• PNG-format with transparent background

• Minimum 272×272 pixels

44 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals

Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Setup > Personalization , and open the Ringtones tab.

Change the ringtone

1. Choose a ringtone from the drop-down list.

2. Click Save to make it the active ringtone.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About ringtones

A set of ringtones is installed on the device. Use the web interface to choose a ringtone, and set the ringtone volume.

You can play back the choosen ringtone from the web interface. Note that the ringtone will be played back on the device itself, and not on the computer running the web interface.

Set the ringtone volume

Use the slide bar to adjust the ringtone volume.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

45

Play back the ringtone

Click the play button (  ►  ) to play back the ringtone.

Use the stop button (   ) to end the playback.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Manage the Favorites list

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to

Setup > Favorites .

Import/Export contacts from file

Click Export to save the local contacts in a file; and click Import to bring in contacts from a file.

The current local contacts are discarded when you import new contacts from a file.

Add or edit a contact

1. Click Add contact to make a new local contact, or click a contact’s name followed by Edit contact .

2. Fill in or update the form that pops up.

Choose a folder in the folder drop down list in order to store the contact in a sub-folder.

Click Add contact method and fill in the new input fields if you want to store more than one contact method for the contact (for example video address, telephone and mobile number).

3. Click Save to store the local contact.

Delete a contact

1. Click a contacts name followed by

Edit contact .

2. Click Delete to remove the local contact.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals

Add or edit a sub-folder

1. Click Add folder to make a new sub-folder, or click one of the listed sub-folders followed by

Edit folder to change an existing sub-folder.

2. Fill in or update the form that pops up.

3. Click Save to create or update the folder.

Delete a sub-folder

1. Click a folder’s name followed by Edit folder .

2. Click Delete to remove the folder and all its contacts and sub-folders. Confirm your choice in the dialog that pops up.

46

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Manage Favorites using the device’s user interface

For Boards this only applies to a paired

Touch 10, not to the board itself.

Add a contact in the Favorites list

1. Select Call on the home screen.

2. Select the contact you want to add.

3. Select Add to favorites .

The contact you add will be placed in the top folder. You cannot select or create a sub-folder.

Remove a contact from the

Favorites list

1. Select Call on the home screen.

2. Select the Favorites tab.

3. Select the contact you want to remove.

4. Select Remove favorite .

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Set up accessibility features

Flashing screen for incoming calls

To make it easier for the hearing impaired users to notice when someone is calling, the screen can be setup to flash red and gray on incoming calls.

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration .

2. Go to UserInterface > Accessibility > IncomingCallNotification and select AmplifiedVisuals .

3. Click Save .

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

47 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Provisioning of product specific configurations from CUCM

(page 1 of 2)

This chapter describes how to provision settings or parameters to a device (endpoint) using the method that was introduced in Cisco

UCM Release 12.5(1)SU1.

Prior to Cisco UCM release 12.5(1)SU1, only a limited set of product-specific configurations were pushed from UCM to the device. The administrator had to rely on Cisco TMS or the web interface of the device to configure all the other settings.

From CUCM release 12.5(1)SU1 more settings or parameters can be provisioned from CUCM. The list of settings matches what users see on their device (public xConfigurations), with the exception of Network, Provisioning, SIP and H.323 settings.

For more information about CUCM refer to the Video Endpoints

Management chapter of the ►  Feature Configuration Guide for

Cisco Unified Communications Manager, Release 12.5(1)SU1 .

Configuration control modes

Based on the deployment needs, administrators can configure various configuration control modes in the CUCM administration interface. You can decide whether you want to control the configuration settings from CUCM, the device, or both of them together.

These are the various configuration control modes:

• Unified CM and Endpoint (default): Use this mode if you want the CUCM and the device to operate as the multimaster source for provisioning device data. CUCM reads the xConfiguration data automatically from the device, and any updates made locally on the device is synchronised with the

CUCM server instantly.

• Unified CM: CUCM operates as the centralized master source for provisioning device data. CUCM ignores any changes that are done locally on the device, and therefore such changes will be overridden the next time CUCM applies a new configuration to the device.

• Endpoint: The endpoint operates as the centralized master source of configuration data. In this mode, the endpoint ignores any configuration data from the CUCM and doesn’t synchronize back the changes done locally.

This mode is typically used when an integrator is installing the devices and wants to control the configuration locally from the device.

Pull configurations from the device on-demand

Administrators can use the Pull xConfig. from Device option in

CUCM to pull configuration changes from the devices on-demand at any time.

This option is enabled only if the device is registered.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Supported CE software versions

Any device that supports CE9.8 or higher can use this new provisioning layout in

CUCM.

If the device has a software version prior to CE9.8, you will be able to view the complete set of parameters in the CUCM user interface; but you can only configure the subset that is marked with a “#”.

The “#” is to the right of each parameter value.

The full set of parameters functions only if you upgrade the device to CE9.8 or higher.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

48

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Provisioning of product specific configurations from CUCM

(page 2 of 2)

Set up provisioning from CUCM

1. Sign in to CUCM, navigate to Device >

Phone , and find your device.

2. Find the Product Specific Configuration

Layout section (see illustration).

3. Click the Miscellaneous category and find the Configuration Control Mode setting.

Choose your preferred mode: Unified CM,

Endpoint, or Unified CM and Endpoint (see the description on the previous page).

4. Click the Pull xConfig. from Device button if you want to load the current configuration from the device.

5. Select a category and set a value for the configurations you want to change.

6. Finally, click Save and Apply Config , just like you do in earlier CUCM versions.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Settings marked with a hash, #

Settings that also were available in

Cisco UCM releases prior to 12.5(1)

SU1.

Settings or parameters

The settings that belong to the selected category.

Categories

The device settings are grouped in categories. These are the same categories that you find in the web interface of the device. They also correspond to the API command path.

Miscellaneous is an exception to this rule. In this category you find settings that only can be set by CUCM. They don't correspond to a local setting on the device.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

49

Pull configurations from the device on-demand

Click this button to pull any data configuration from the device ondemand.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Chapter 3

Peripherals

50 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Connect an input source

(page 1 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration , to find the settings referred below.

Connect a computer or other content source

You can connect one input source, for example a computer, to the device’s HDMI input (Input Connector 2) in order to share content locally or with conference participants.

The HDMI input supports resolutions up to 3840 × 2160 at 30 fps; and up to 1080p at 60 fps. You need a High Speed HDMI 1.4b cable to support the high resolutions and frame rates.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

The connector panel is at the bottom, rear side.

Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S

Input Connector 2

HDMI input (audio and video) for computer or other content source

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Webex Board 55

51

Webex Board 70 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Connect an input source

(page 2 of 2)

Set type and name for an input source

We recommend that you set type and name for an input source:

• Video > Input > Connector n > InputSourceType

• Video > Input > Connector n > Name

These settings determine the names and icons that are shown on the user interfaces. Intuitive names and icons make source selection easier.

Note that Input Connector 1 is the integrated camera.

Maintenance

About video and content quality

Use the Video > Input > Connector n > Quality setting to optimize quality with respect to motion or sharpness.

Typically, you should choose Motion when there is a lot of motion in the picture. Choose Sharpness when you want the highest quality of detailed images and graphics.

The default value is Sharpness for Connector 2.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

52 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Information about 4K resolution

Connecting a computer

If an error occurs when you connect a computer, a message will show on screen and on the Touch 10 controller.

The default preferred resolution on the video input connector is 1080p60 (1920_1080_60). If you want to use 4K resolution with the computer, sign in to the web interface, navigate to Setup > Configuration > Video > Input > Connector n >

PreferredResolution , and adjust the value.

Alternatively, you can override the resolution from the display/ monitor configuration offered by the operating system of the connected computer.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Checklist

For guaranteed operation, order HDMI cables from Cisco, or use certified HDMI cables. Refer to the

► Information about

HDMI cables

chapter.

Check that the video conferencing device's input connector is configured correctly.

Check that the device (computer) has support for 4K and that it is configured correctly.

The need for high quality cables increases with 4K usage:

• 4kp30 uses about twice the data rate of 1080p60

• 4kp60 uses about four times the data rate of 1080p60

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

53 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Information about HDMI cables

HDMI cables are required for presentation sources.

For guaranteed operation we recommend that you order

HDMI cables from Cisco * , or use certified HDMI cables.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

HDMI cables for presentation sources

A presentation source can be a PC/laptop, document camera, media player, whiteboard, or other device.

The resolution formats larger than 1920×1080@60fps require use of high speed HDMI cables. For guaranteed operation, use a

HDMI cable from Cisco, or use a cable that complies with the high speed HDMI 1.4b Category 2 specification.

We recommend that you order the HDMI presentation cable from

Cisco (HDMI 1.4b Category 2).

You can find more information about

HDMI cables at ► http://www.hdmi.org

* The following products do not support Cisco's presentation cable for HDMI,

Display Port, and Mini Display Port (CAB-HDMI-MULT-9M=): Room Kit,

Room Kit Plus, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,

Room 70 G2, and Boards.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

54 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Set up the Best overview feature

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration , to find the settings referred.

The best overview feature uses automatic camera framing to select the best view based on how many people are in the room.

The camera uses digital face detection to automatically create the best view of a single person or a group of people in the room. If people are moving around in the room, or additional participants enters the room, the feature will adopt to the changes and automatically adjust the view to include all persons in the picture.

Maintenance

Configure Best overview

Use the Cameras > SpeakerTrack settings to configure best overview.

Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Mode

Auto : Best overview is enabled in general. The device will detect people in the room and automatically select the best camera framing. Users can switch Best overview on or off instantly in the Settings > Advanced Settings panel on the

Board.

Off : Best overview is switched off, and it is not possible to switch it on from the user interface.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

55 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Connect the Touch 10 controller

(page 1 of 3)

Touch 10 must be paired to the video conferencing device via the network (LAN). This is referred to as remote pairing.

Connect Touch 10 to the video conferencing device via the network (LAN)

Connect Touch 10 and the video conferencing device to network wall sockets or to a network switch as illustrated.

Touch 10 set-up

Once Touch 10 is connected to power, the set-up procedure begins.

Follow the instructions on screen.

When the Select a room system screen appears, note the following:

• A list of devices signalling that they are available for paring will show up on the screen. Tap the name of the device you want to pair with.

Note that the following must be fulfilled for a device to show up in the list:

• The device and Touch 10 must be on the same subnet.

• The device must have been restarted within the last 10 minutes. If the device does not appear in the list, try restarting it.

• If the device does not appear in the list of available devices, enter its IP address or hostname in the input field. Tap Connect .

• You have to log in with username and passphrase for the paring process to commence. Tap Login .

A user with the USER role is sufficient; you do not need the

ADMIN role to perform this task.

Read more about how to create a user account and assign a role to it in the

► User administration

chapter.

If Touch 10 needs software upgrade, new software will be downloaded from the device and installed on the unit automatically as part of the set-up procedure. Touch 10 restarts after the upgrade.

The connector panel is at the bottom, rear side.

Power

• 100-240 VAC

• 50/60 Hz

PoE injector

SWITCH

AP

Contact information

The video conferencing device’s name or address is displayed in the status bar when Touch 10 is successfully paired to the device.

Standard Ethernet cable

Standard Ethernet cable

PoE rated Ethernet cable

The Ethernet connector is at the rear of Touch 10.

Network

(LAN)

Network

(LAN) 1

1 If the network infrastructure provides

Power over Ethernet (PoE), you do not need a PoE injector; Touch 10 should be connected directly to the wall socket

(Ethernet switch) with a PoE rated

Ethernet cable.

For safety, the PoE source must be in the same building as Touch 10. The PoE rated Ethernet cable can be up to 100 m

(330 ft).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

56

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Connect the Touch 10 controller

(page 2 of 3)

Cisco Touch 10 physical interface

This is the new version of the Touch 10 controller launched late 2017. It has the same functionality as the previous version, but has a slightly different physical interface. The new device is identified by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back.

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Touch screen

Adjustable support to accommodate individual ergonomic needs

Factory reset

(behind cover)

Micro-USB: for maintenance only

(behind cover)

Ethernet with PoE: for power and Ethernet

Sound bar for audio adjustment

Audio mute

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

57

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Connect the Touch 10 controller

(page 3 of 3)

Cisco TelePresence Touch 10 physical interface

See next page for a newer version of the Touch 10 controller.

Touch screen

Adjustable support to accommodate individual ergonomic needs

Sound bar for audio adjustment

Audio mute

Two USB connectors

(not in use)

Mini-jack, 3.5 mm

(not in use)

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Micro-USB: for maintenance only

Ethernet with PoE: for power and Ethernet

Not in use

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

58

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Connect the ISDN Link

The ISDN Link enables a video conferencing device to use ISDN lines for connectivity, and enables both video calls and telephone calls over the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).

ISDN Link support ISDN BRI, ISDN PRI and V.35. ISDN can be used in addition to regular IP connectivity for SIP or H.323 calls, or without any IP infrastructure.

ISDN Link is managed from the video conferencing device's web interface. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Peripherals .

Requirements and limitations:

• The video conferencing system must be connected to a

Touch controller

• The ISDN Link must be running IL1.1.7 software or later

• The video conferencing device must have IPv6 enabled in the web interface or API in order to communicate with the ISDN

Link

• Observe the network topology in the ISDN Link Installation

Guide in order to guarantee a successful installation

• The video conferencing device and ISDN Link must be on the same subnet. If the endpoint or ISDN Link are assigned new

IP addresses they will only remain paired as long as they are kept in the same subnet.

• Video conferencing devices that are registered to the Cisco

Webex cloud service are not able to use ISDN Link.

Setup and configuration

More information about ISDN Link (Release Notes, Installation

Guide, Administrator Guide, API Guide, Compliance and Safety guide) is found here: ►  https://www.cisco.com/go/isdnlink-docs

BRI

1-4

PRI NET LAN port

Video conferencing device port

Power

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Setup with LAN and direct connection between the video conferencing device and ISDN Link

This is the recommended setup. But there are other options, so see the user documentation for additional examples:

►  https://www.cisco.com/go/isdnlink-docs

PC/Laptop for system management

ISDN Link, rear panel

Maintenance

LAN

Device settings

Video conferencing device (represented by an SX80 codec)

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

59

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Chapter 4

Maintenance

60 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Upgrade the device software

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

Software Upgrade .

Peripherals Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Download new software

Each software version has a unique file name. Go to the Cisco

Download Software web page, and select your product:

►   https://software.cisco.com/download/home

The format of the file name is:

“cmterm-s53200ce9_9_x-yyy.k3.cop.sgn” where "x" represents the dot dot release number, and "yyy" represents a unique identifier of the software.

Install new software

Download the appropriate software package and store it on your computer. This is a .cop.sgn file. Don’t change the file name.

1. Click Browse...

and find the .cop.sgn file that contains the new software.

The software version will be detected and shown.

2. Click Install software to start the installation process.

The complete installation normally take no longer than 15 minutes.

You can follow the progress on the web page. The device restarts automatically after the installation.

You must sign in anew in order to continue working with the web interface after the restart.

Software release notes

For a complete overview of the news and changes, we recommend reading the Software Release Notes (CE9).

Go to: ►

  https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/ collaboration-endpoints/spark-board/tsd-products-supportseries-home.html

Check new software version

When you have selected a file, the software version is shown here

Software download

Go to the Cisco Download Software web page, and select your product: ► https:// software.cisco.com/download/home

The Webex Boards and Room series can be upgraded from the web interface using COP files.

The SX, MX and DX series can be upgraded from the web interface using

PKG files.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

61

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Add option keys

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

Option Keys .

You see a list of all option keys, also the ones that are not installed on your device.

Contact your Cisco representative for information about how to get option keys for the uninstalled options.

Peripherals

The device’s serial number

You need the device’s serial number when ordering an option key.

Add an option key

1. Enter an Option Key in the text input field.

2. Click Add option key .

If you want to add more than one option key, repeat these steps for all keys.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About option keys

Your device may or may not have one or more software options installed. In order to activate the optional functionality the corresponding option key must be present on the device.

Each device has unique option keys.

Option keys are not deleted when performing a software upgrade or factory reset, so they need to be added only once.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

62 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Device status

Device information overview

Sign in to the web interface to see the System Information page.

This page shows the product type, device name and basic information about the hardware, software, installed options and network address. Registration status for the video networks (SIP and H.323) is included, as well as the number/URI to use when making a call to the device.

Peripherals Device settings

Detailed device status

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Status in order to find more detailed status information * .

Search for a status entry

Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All entries that contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Entries that have these letters in their value space are also shown.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Select a category and navigate to the correct status

The device status is grouped in categories. Choose a category in the left pane to show the related status to the right.

* The status shown in the illustration serve as an example. The status of your device may be different.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

63 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Run diagnostics

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

Diagnostics .

The diagnostics page lists the status for some common sources of errors * .

Errors and critical issues are clearly marked in red color; warnings are yellow.

Peripherals

Run diagnostics

Click Re-run diagnostics to ensure that the list is up to date.

Leave standby mode

Click Wake up the system to wake up a device that is in standby mode.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

* The messages shown in the illustration serve as examples. Your device may show other information.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

64 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Download log files

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to

Maintenance > System Logs .

Configuration

Download all log files

Click Download logs archive...

and follow the instructions.

An anonymized call history is included in the log files by default.

Use the drop down list if you want to exclude the call history from the log files, or if you want to include the full call history (non-anonymous caller/callee).

Open/save one log file

Click the file name to open the log file in the web browser; right click to save the file on the computer.

Peripherals

Start extended logging

Click Start extended logging...

.

Extended logging lasts for

3 or 10 minutes, depending on whether full capture of network traffic is included or not.

Click Stop extended logging if you want to stop the extended logging before it times out.

As default, the network traffic is not captured. Use the drop down menu if you want to include partial or full capture of network traffic.

Refresh a log file list

Click the refresh button for

Current logs or Historical logs to update the corresponding lists.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

65

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About log files

The log files are Cisco specific debug files which may be requested by the

Cisco support organization if you need technical support.

The current log files are time stamped event log files.

All current log files are archived in a time stamped historical log file each time the device restarts. If the maximum number of historical log files is reached, the oldest one will be overwritten.

Extended logging mode

Extended logging mode may be switched on to help diagnose network issues and problems during call setup. While in this mode more information is stored in the log files.

Extended logging uses more of the device’s resources, and may cause the device to under-perform. Only use extended logging mode when you are troubleshooting an issue.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Access the Technical support screen

You can access the Technical support screen by holding the screen with one finger and tapping the Home button three times.

From the Technical support screen you can access:

• Device information

• Media statistics

• Network information and diagnostics

• Hardware diagnostics (microphone levels, touch screen, best overview, and camera)

• Logs

• Restart the board

• Factory reset

Peripherals Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

66 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Create a remote support user

Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Maintenance > System

Recovery and select the Remote Support User tab.

The remote support user should only be enabled for troubleshooting reasons when instructed by Cisco TAC.

Peripherals

Create remote support user

1. Click Create user .

2. Open a case with Cisco TAC.

3. Copy the text in the Token field and send it to Cisco TAC.

4. Cisco TAC will generate a password .

The remote support user is valid for seven days, or until it is deleted.

Delete remote support user

Click Delete user .

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

67

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About the remote support user

In cases where you need to diagnose problems on the device you can create a remote support user.

The remote support user is granted read access to the device and has access to a limited set of commands that can aid troubleshooting.

You will need assistance from Cisco

Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to acquire the password for the remote support user.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Device settings

Backup and restore configurations and custom elements

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

Backup and Restore .

You can include custom elements as well as configurations in a backup file (zip-format). You can choose which of the following elements to include in the bundle:

• Branding images

• Macros

• Favorites

• Sign-in banner

• UI extensions

• Configurations/settings (all or a sub-set)

The backup file can either be restored manually from the device’s web interface, or you can generalize the backup bundle so that it can be provisioned across multiple devices, for example using

Cisco UCM or TMS (see the next chapters).

Create a backup file

1. Open the Create backup tab.

2. Select the elements you want to include in the backup file.

Elements that currently don’t exist on the device are greyed out.

3. Select which settings - if any - you want to include in the backup file. Note the following:

• As default, all settings are included in the backup file.

• You can remove one or more settings manually by deleting them from the list on the web page.

• If you want to remove all settings that are specific to one device, click Remove system-specific configurations .

This is useful if you are going to restore the backup bundle on other devices.

4. Click Download backup to store the elements in a zip-file on your computer.

Restore a backup file

1. Choose the Restore backup tab.

2. Click Browse...

and find the backup file you want to restore.

All settings and elements in the backup file will be applied.

3. Click Upload file to apply the backup.

Some settings may require that you restart the device before they take effect.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Additional information

Restoring macros

If a backup file that contains macros is restored on a device the following applies:

• The macro runtime is started or restarted.

• The macros are automatically activated (started).

Restoring branding images

If a backup bundle contains branding images, the UserInterface Wallpaper setting is automatically set to Auto.

This means that the branding images will automatically be displayed, possibly replacing a custom wallpaper.

The backup file

The backup file is a zip-file that contains several files. It is important that the files are at the top level within the zip-file, and not include in a folder.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

68

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Device settings

CUCM provisioning of custom elements

A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore configurations and custom elements

chapter, can be used as a customization template for multiple devices.

The customization template (backup file) may be hosted on either:

• the CUCM TFTP file service, or

• a custom web server that can be reached by the devices on

HTTP or HTTPS.

Upload a customization template to the TFTP file server

1. Sign in to Cisco Unified OS Administration.

2. Navigate to Software Upgrades > TFTP File Management .

3. Click Upload File . Enter the name and path of the customization template in the input field.

4. Click Upload File .

When a device get information from CUCM (Cisco Unified

Communications Manager) about the name and location of a customization template, the device will contact the server, download the file, and restore the custom elements.

Configurations will not be restored on the device, even if they are part of the backup file that you use as a customization template.

Add customization provisioning information for each device

1. Sign in to Cisco Unified CM Administration .

2. Navigate to Device > Phone .

3. Fill in the Customization Provisioning fields in the product specific configuration section of the relevant devices:

• Customization File: The customization template file name

(for example: backup.zip) *

• Customization Hash Type: SHA512

• Cutomization Hash: The SHA512 checksum for the customization template.

If these fields are not present, you must install a newer Device

Package on CUCM.

4. Click Save and Apply Config to push the configuration to the devices.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SHA512 checksum

Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum of a file by restoring it to a device using its web interface.

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > Backup and Restore .

2. Choose the Restore backup tab.

3. Click Browse...

and find the file you want to calculate the checksum for.

Then you can see the SHA512 checksum at the bottom of the page.

CUCM documentation

►  https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/ support/unified-communications/unifiedcommunications-manager-callmanager/ tsd-products-support-series-home.html

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

* If not using the TFTP Service, you must enter the complete URI for the customization template:

<hostname>:<portnumber>/<path-and-filename>

For example:

• http://host:6970/backup.zip, or

• https://host:6971/backup.zip

69 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Device settings

TMS provisioning of custom elements

A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore configurations and custom elements

chapter, can be used as a customization template for multiple devices.

The backup file must be hosted on a custom web server that can be reached by the devices on HTTP or HTTPS.

When a device get information from TMS (TelePresence

Management Suite) about the name and location of the backup file, the device will contact the server, download the file, and restore the custom elements.

Create and apply a configuration template

1. Create a configurations template.

2. Add a custom command containing the following XML string in the configuration template:

<Command>

<Provisioning>

<Service>

<Fetch>

<URL> web-server-address </URL>

<Checksum> checksum </Checksum>

<Origin> origin </Origin>

</Fetch>

</Service>

</Provisioning>

</Command>

where

web-server-address:

The URI to the backup file (for example, http://host/backup.zip).

checksum:

The SHA512 checksum of the backup file.

origin:

Provisioning *

3. Select the devices you want to push the configuration template to, and click Set on systems .

Read the ►  Cisco TMS administrator guide for details how to create TMS configurations templates and make custom commands.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SHA512 checksum

Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum of a file by restoring it to a device using its web interface.

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > Backup and Restore .

2. Choose the Restore backup tab.

3. Click Browse...

and find the file you want to calculate the checksum for.

Then you can see the SHA512 checksum at the bottom of the page.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

* If not setting this parameter to Provisioning , also configurations that are part of the backup file will be pushed to the device. If the backup file contains configurations that are specific to one device, for example static IP addresses, device name, and contact information, you may and up with devices that you cannot reach.

70 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Device settings

Revert to the previously used software image

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

System Recovery .

We recommend you to back up the log files, configurations, and custom elements of the device before you swap to the previously used software image.

Back up log files, configurations and custom elements

1. Select the Backup tab.

2. Click Download logs and follow the instructions to save the log files on your computer.

3. Click Download backup and follow the instructions to save the backup bundle on your computer.

Revert to the previously used software image

Only administrators, or when in contact with Cisco technical support, should perform this procedure.

1. Select the Software Recovery Swap tab.

2. Click Switch to software: cex.y.z...

, where x.y.z indicates the software version.

3. Click OK to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have changed your mind.

Wait while the device resets. The device restarts automatically when finished. This procedure may take a few minutes.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About the previously used software image

If there is a severe problem with the device, switching to the previously used software image may help solving the problem.

If the device has not been factory reset since the last software upgrade, the previously used software image still resides on the device. You do not have to download the software again.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

71 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Device settings

Factory reset the video conferencing device

(page 1 of 3)

If there is a severe problem with the device, the last resort may be to reset it to its default factory settings.

It is not possible to undo a factory reset.

Always consider reverting to the previously used software image before performing a factory reset. In many situations this will recover the device. Read about software swapping in the

► Revert to the previously used software image

chapter.

We recommend that you use the web interface or user interface to factory reset the device. If these interfaces are not available, use the reset pin-hole.

A factory reset implies:

• Call logs are deleted.

• Passphrases are reset to default.

• All device parameters are reset to default values.

• All files that have been uploaded to the device are deleted.

This includes, but is not limited to, branding elements, certificates, and favorites lists.

• The previous (inactive) software image is deleted.

• Option keys are not affected.

The device restarts automatically after the factory reset. It is using the same software image as before.

We recommend that you back up the log files, configurations, and custom elements of the device before you perform a factory reset; otherwise these data will be lost.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

72 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Device settings

Factory reset the video conferencing device

(page 2 of 3)

Factory reset using the web interface

We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of the device before you continue with the factory reset.

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

System Recovery .

1. Select the Factory Reset tab, and read the provided information carefully.

2. Click Perform a factory reset...

.

3. Click Yes to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have changed your mind.

4. Wait while the device reverts to the default factory settings.

When finished, the device restarts automatically. This may take a few minutes.

When the device has been successfully reset to factory settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.

Factory reset from the Technical support screen

We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of the device before you continue with the factory reset.

1. To access the Technical support screen , hold down one finger on the board's screen, and press the home button three times.

2. Select Factory reset .

3. Select Reset to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have changed your mind.

4. Wait while the device reverts to the default factory settings.

When finished, the device restarts automatically. This may take a few minutes.

When the device has been successfully reset to factory settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.

Factory reset from the user interface

We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of the device before you continue with the factory reset.

1. Select the device name or address at the top of the user interface.

2. Select Settings .

3. Select Factory reset .

4. Select Reset to confirm your choice, or Back if you have changed your mind.

5. Wait while the device reverts to the default factory settings.

When finished, the device restarts automatically. This may take a few minutes.

When the device has been successfully reset to factory settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Back up log files, configurations, and custom elements

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance > System Recovery .

1. Select the Backup tab.

2. Click Download logs and follow the instructions to save the log files on your computer.

3. Click Download backup and follow the instructions to save the backup bundle on your computer.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

73

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Factory reset the video conferencing device

(page 3 of 3)

Factory reset using the reset button

We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of the device before you continue with the factory reset.

1. Locate the reset button (pin hole) on the connector panel.

2. Use a paper clip (or similar) to press and hold the recessed reset button until the screen turns black (approximately

10 seconds). Then release the button.

3. Wait while the device reverts to the default factory settings.

When finished, the device restarts automatically. This may take a few minutes.

When the device has been successfully reset to factory settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.

Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S

Webex Board 55

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Reset button

The recessed button can be quite difficult to use. You should feel the button go down when pushed.

Webex Board 70

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

74 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Factory reset Cisco Touch 10

This chapter applies to the new Touch 10 controller that was launched late 2017 (Cisco Touch 10).

This device is identified by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back.

See the next page for the older version.

In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when in contact with the Cisco support organization.

When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video conferencing device) is reverted to factory defaults.

It is not possible to undo a factory reset.

Peripherals

1. Open the small cover at the rear to find the reset button.

2. Press and hold the reset button until the mute button at the front starts blinking (approximately 5 seconds). Then release the button.

Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings and restarts.

Touch 10 must be paired to the video conferencing device anew. When successfully paired it receives a new configuration automatically from the device.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About pairing and how to connect Touch 10 to the video conferencing device

In order to use the Touch 10 controller, it must be paired to the video conferencing device via LAN (remote pairing).

Read about pairing and how to connect

Touch 10 to the video conferencing

device in the ► Connect the Touch 10 controller chapter.

Open the cover to find the reset button

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Mute button starts blinking

75

Reset button www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Factory reset Cisco TelePresence Touch 10

This chapter applies to the first Touch 10 controller (Cisco

TelePresence Touch 10).

This device has no logo on front.

See the previous page for the newer version that was launched late 2017.

In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when in contact with the Cisco support organization.

When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video conferencing device) is reverted to factory defaults.

1. Locate the Mute and Volume down buttons.

2. Press and hold the Mute button until it starts blinking (red and green). It takes approximately 10 seconds.

3. Press the Volume down button twice.

Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings and restarts.

Touch 10 must be paired to the video conferencing device anew. When successfully paired it receives a new configuration automatically from the device.

It is not possible to undo a factory reset.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

About pairing and how to connect Touch 10 to the video conferencing device

In order to use the Touch 10 controller, it must be paired to the video conferencing device via LAN (remote pairing).

Read about pairing and how to connect

Touch 10 to the video conferencing

device in the ► Connect the Touch 10 controller chapter.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

76

Mute

Volume down www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Capture user interface screenshots

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >

User Interface Screenshots .

Peripherals Device settings

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Delete screenshots

If you want to delete all screenshots, click Remove all .

To delete just one screenshot, click the

×

button for that screenshot.

About user interface screenshots

You can capture screenshots both of a Touch controller that is connected to the device, and of the main screen with menus, indicators and messages (also know as on-screen display ).

Capture a screenshot

Click Take screenshot of Touch Panel to capture a screenshot of the Touch controller, or click Take screenshot of OSD to capture a screenshot of the main screen (on screen display).

The screenshot displays in the area below the buttons. It may take up to 30 seconds before the screenshot is ready.

All captured snapshots are included in the list above the buttons. Click the screenshot ID to display the image.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

77

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Chapter 5

Device settings

78 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Overview of the device settings

In the following pages you will find a complete list of the device settings which are configured from the Setup > Configuration page on the web interface.

Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the device then sign in.

How to find the IP address

1. Select the device name or address at the top of the user interface.

2. Select Settings , followed by About this device .d

Peripherals

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

79

Audio settings ................................................................................................................. 84

Audio DefaultVolume ........................................................................................................... 84

Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate ...................................................................................... 84

Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled ........................................................................................ 84

Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone ...................................................................................... 84

Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume .................................................................................. 84

Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume ............................................................................................. 85

Audio Ultrasound Mode ...................................................................................................... 85

BYOD settings ................................................................................................................. 86

BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled ........................................................................................ 86

CallHistory settings ......................................................................................................... 87

CallHistory Mode ................................................................................................................. 87

Cameras settings ............................................................................................................ 88

Cameras Camera [n] Backlight DefaultMode ...................................................................... 88

Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel .................................................................... 88

Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode ............................................................................... 88

Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode ...................................................................................... 88

Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level .................................................................................... 89

Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode.................................................................................... 89

Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode ............................................................................................. 89

Conference settings ....................................................................................................... 90

Conference ActiveControl Mode ........................................................................................ 90

Conference AutoAnswer Delay ........................................................................................... 90

Conference AutoAnswer Mode .......................................................................................... 90

Conference AutoAnswer Mute ........................................................................................... 90

Conference CallProtocolIPStack ......................................................................................... 90

Conference DefaultCall Protocol ........................................................................................ 91

Conference DefaultCall Rate ............................................................................................... 91

Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout ......................................................................... 91

Conference Encryption Mode ............................................................................................. 91

Conference FarEndControl Mode ....................................................................................... 91

Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability ....................................................................... 92

Conference FarEndMessage Mode .................................................................................... 92

Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode ............................................................................ 94

Conference MaxReceiveCallRate ....................................................................................... 92

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate ................................................................................ 92

Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate ............................................................................... 93

Conference MaxTransmitCallRate ....................................................................................... 92

Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode ..................................................................... 93

Conference Multipoint Mode .............................................................................................. 93

Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold ....................................................................... 94

Conference Presentation RelayQuality ............................................................................... 94

Conference VideoBandwidth Mode .................................................................................... 94

FacilityService settings ................................................................................................... 95

FacilityService Service [n] CallType .................................................................................... 95

FacilityService Service [n] Name ........................................................................................ 95

FacilityService Service [n] Number ..................................................................................... 95

FacilityService Service [n] Type .......................................................................................... 95

H323 settings .................................................................................................................. 96

H323 Authentication LoginName ........................................................................................ 96

H323 Authentication Mode ................................................................................................. 96

H323 Authentication Password .......................................................................................... 96

H323 CallSetup Mode ......................................................................................................... 96

H323 Encryption KeySize .................................................................................................... 97

H323 Gatekeeper Address ................................................................................................. 97

H323 H323Alias E164 ......................................................................................................... 97

H323 H323Alias ID .............................................................................................................. 97

H323 NAT Address ............................................................................................................. 98

H323 NAT Mode ................................................................................................................. 97

H323 PortAllocation ............................................................................................................ 98

HttpClient settings .......................................................................................................... 99

HttpClient AllowHTTP ......................................................................................................... 99

HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS ......................................................................................... 99

HttpClient Mode .................................................................................................................. 99

HttpFeedback settings .................................................................................................. 100

HttpFeedback TlsVerify ..................................................................................................... 100

Logging settings ........................................................................................................... 101

Logging Debug Wifi ...........................................................................................................101

Logging External Mode ......................................................................................................101

Logging External Protocol ..................................................................................................101

Logging External Server Address ......................................................................................101

Logging External Server Port .............................................................................................101

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

80

Logging External TlsVerify ................................................................................................ 102

Logging Internal Mode ...................................................................................................... 102

Logging Mode ................................................................................................................... 102

Macros settings ............................................................................................................ 103

Macros AutoStart .............................................................................................................. 103

Macros Mode .................................................................................................................... 103

Network settings ........................................................................................................... 104

Network [n] DNS DNSSEC Mode ...................................................................................... 104

Network [n] DNS Domain Name ........................................................................................ 104

Network [n] DNS Server [m] Address ................................................................................ 104

Network [n] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity ...................................................................... 105

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Md5 ....................................................................................... 106

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Peap ...................................................................................... 106

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Tls ......................................................................................... 106

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls ........................................................................................ 106

Network [n] IEEE8021X Identity ......................................................................................... 105

Network [n] IEEE8021X Mode ............................................................................................ 104

Network [n] IEEE8021X Password ..................................................................................... 105

Network [n] IEEE8021X TlsVerify ....................................................................................... 105

Network [n] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate..................................................................... 105

Network [n] IPStack ........................................................................................................... 106

Network [n] IPv4 Address .................................................................................................. 107

Network [n] IPv4 Assignment ............................................................................................ 107

Network [n] IPv4 Gateway ................................................................................................. 107

Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask ........................................................................................... 107

Network [n] IPv6 Address ................................................................................................. 108

Network [n] IPv6 Assignment ............................................................................................ 107

Network [n] IPv6 DHCPOptions ......................................................................................... 108

Network [n] IPv6 Gateway ................................................................................................. 108

Network [n] MTU ............................................................................................................... 108

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Audio ........................................................................................ 109

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Data .......................................................................................... 109

Network [n] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6 ......................................................................................110

Network [n] QoS Diffserv NTP ...........................................................................................110

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Signalling .................................................................................. 109

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Video ........................................................................................ 109

Network [n] QoS Mode ...................................................................................................... 108

Network [n] RemoteAccess Allow ......................................................................................110

Network [n] Speed .............................................................................................................110

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] TrafficControl Mode ........................................................................................111

Network [n] VLAN Voice Mode ..........................................................................................111

Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId ..........................................................................................111

NetworkServices settings ..............................................................................................112

NetworkServices CDP Mode .............................................................................................112

NetworkServices H323 Mode ...........................................................................................112

NetworkServices HTTP Mode ...........................................................................................112

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName ........................................................................112

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode .................................................................................113

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl ...............................................................................113

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password ..........................................................................113

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url ......................................................................................113

NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode ..............................................................................113

NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL ................................................................................114

NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion ......................................................114

NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity .............................................................114

NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate ...............................................................114

NetworkServices NTP Mode .............................................................................................114

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address .........................................................................115

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Key ................................................................................115

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyAlgorithn ..................................................................115

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId .............................................................................115

NetworkServices SIP Mode ...............................................................................................115

NetworkServices SMTP From............................................................................................116

NetworkServices SMTP Mode...........................................................................................116

NetworkServices SMTP Password ....................................................................................116

NetworkServices SMTP Port .............................................................................................116

NetworkServices SMTP Security ......................................................................................117

NetworkServices SMTP Server .........................................................................................116

NetworkServices SMTP Username ...................................................................................116

NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName .......................................................................117

NetworkServices SNMP Host [n] Address .........................................................................117

NetworkServices SNMP Mode ..........................................................................................117

NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact...........................................................................117

NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation .........................................................................118

NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey ..............................................................................118

NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm ..........................................................................118

NetworkServices SSH Mode .............................................................................................118

Administrator Guide

Appendices Maintenance

NetworkServices UPnP Mode ...........................................................................................118

NetworkServices UPnP Timeout .......................................................................................119

NetworkServices Websocket ............................................................................................119

NetworkServices WelcomeText .........................................................................................119

NetworkServices Wifi Allowed ..........................................................................................119

NetworkServices Wifi Enabled ..........................................................................................119

NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode ...................................................................................... 120

Peripherals settings ...................................................................................................... 121

Peripherals Profile Cameras ..............................................................................................121

Peripherals Profile ControlSystems ...................................................................................121

Phonebook settings ...................................................................................................... 122

Phonebook Server [n] ID ................................................................................................... 122

Phonebook Server [n] Pagination ...................................................................................... 122

Phonebook Server [n] TlsVerify ......................................................................................... 122

Phonebook Server [n] Type ............................................................................................... 123

Phonebook Server [n] URL ................................................................................................ 123

Provisioning settings ..................................................................................................... 124

Provisioning Connectivity...................................................................................................124

Provisioning ExternalManager Address .............................................................................124

Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress ...............................................................124

Provisioning ExternalManager Domain ............................................................................. 125

Provisioning ExternalManager Path .................................................................................. 125

Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol .............................................................................124

Provisioning LoginName ................................................................................................... 125

Provisioning Mode ............................................................................................................ 125

Provisioning Password ...................................................................................................... 126

Provisioning TlsVerify ........................................................................................................ 126

Proximity settings ......................................................................................................... 127

Proximity Mode ..................................................................................................................127

Proximity Services CallControl ..........................................................................................127

Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients ..................................................................127

Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients ......................................................................127

RoomAnalytics settings ................................................................................................ 128

RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode ................................................................ 128

RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall ............................................................................ 128

RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector ......................................................................... 128

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

81

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

RoomReset settings ...................................................................................................... 129

RoomReset Control ........................................................................................................... 129

RTP settings .................................................................................................................. 130

RTP Ports Range Start ...................................................................................................... 130

RTP Ports Range Stop ...................................................................................................... 130

RTP Video Ports Range Start ............................................................................................ 130

RTP Video Ports Range Stop ............................................................................................ 130

Security settings ........................................................................................................... 131

Security Audit Logging Mode ............................................................................................131

Security Audit OnError Action ............................................................................................131

Security Audit Server Address ..........................................................................................131

Security Audit Server Port .................................................................................................131

Security Audit Server PortAssignment ............................................................................. 132

Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime ..................................................................... 132

Security Session InactivityTimeout ................................................................................... 132

Security Session MaxFailedLogins ................................................................................... 132

Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser............................................................................ 132

Security Session MaxTotalSessions ................................................................................. 132

Security Session ShowLastLogon .................................................................................... 133

SerialPort settings ........................................................................................................ 134

SerialPort BaudRate .......................................................................................................... 134

SerialPort LoginRequired .................................................................................................. 134

SerialPort Mode ................................................................................................................ 134

SIP settings ................................................................................................................... 135

SIP ANAT........................................................................................................................... 135

SIP Authentication Password ............................................................................................ 135

SIP Authentication UserName .......................................................................................... 135

SIP DefaultTransport ......................................................................................................... 135

SIP DisplayName ............................................................................................................... 135

SIP Ice DefaultCandidate .................................................................................................. 136

SIP Ice Mode ..................................................................................................................... 136

SIP Line ............................................................................................................................. 136

SIP ListenPort ................................................................................................................... 136

SIP Mailbox ....................................................................................................................... 137

SIP MinimumTLSVersion ................................................................................................... 137

SIP PreferredIPSignaling ................................................................................................... 137

SIP Proxy [n] Address........................................................................................................ 137

Administrator Guide

Appendices Maintenance

SIP TlsVerify ...................................................................................................................... 137

SIP Turn DiscoverMode .................................................................................................... 138

SIP Turn DropRflx .............................................................................................................. 138

SIP Turn Password ............................................................................................................ 138

SIP Turn Server ................................................................................................................. 138

SIP Turn UserName........................................................................................................... 138

SIP Type ............................................................................................................................ 138

SIP URI .............................................................................................................................. 139

Standby settings ........................................................................................................... 140

Standby Control ................................................................................................................ 140

Standby Delay ................................................................................................................... 140

Standby Signage Audio .................................................................................................... 140

Standby Signage InteractionMode.................................................................................... 140

Standby Signage Mode .................................................................................................... 140

Standby Signage RefreshInterval .......................................................................................141

Standby Signage Url ..........................................................................................................141

Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection .................................................................................141

SystemUnit settings ...................................................................................................... 142

SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced .............................................................................142

SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode ....................................................................................142

SystemUnit CrashReporting Url .........................................................................................142

SystemUnit Name ..............................................................................................................142

Time settings ................................................................................................................ 143

Time DateFormat .............................................................................................................. 143

Time TimeFormat .............................................................................................................. 143

Time Zone ......................................................................................................................... 144

UserInterface settings ................................................................................................... 146

UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification ....................................................... 146

UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors ............................................................... 146

UserInterface ContactInfo Type ........................................................................................ 146

UserInterface Features Call End ........................................................................................147

UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls .....................................................................147

UserInterface Features Call Start ......................................................................................147

UserInterface Features Call VideoMute .............................................................................147

UserInterface Features HideAll ..........................................................................................147

UserInterface Features Share Start ...................................................................................147

UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start ......................................................................... 148

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

82

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

UserInterface KeyTones Mode .......................................................................................... 146

UserInterface Language ................................................................................................... 148

UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator ............................................................................ 148

UserInterface OSD Output ................................................................................................ 148

UserInterface Phonebook Mode ....................................................................................... 149

UserInterface Security Mode ............................................................................................ 149

UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode ................................................................................... 149

UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility ............................................................................... 149

UserInterface SoundEffects Mode.................................................................................... 150

UserInterface Wallpaper ................................................................................................... 150

UserManagement settings ............................................................................................ 151

UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter ................................................................................151

UserManagement LDAP Admin Group ..............................................................................151

UserManagement LDAP Attribute ......................................................................................151

UserManagement LDAP BaseDN ......................................................................................151

UserManagement LDAP Encryption ..................................................................................151

UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion .................................................................. 152

UserManagement LDAP Mode ......................................................................................... 152

UserManagement LDAP Server Address ......................................................................... 152

UserManagement LDAP Server Port ................................................................................ 152

UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate .............................................................. 152

Video settings ............................................................................................................... 153

Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition .......................................................................... 153

Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote .................................................................................. 153

Video DefaultMainSource ................................................................................................. 153

Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId ....................................................... 154

Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode ............................................................. 154

Video Input Connector [n] CEC Mode ............................................................................... 154

Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType ..................................................................... 154

Video Input Connector [n] Name ....................................................................................... 154

Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile .......................................................... 155

Video Input Connector [n] PreferredResolution ................................................................ 155

Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection ............................................................. 156

Video Input Connector [n] Quality ..................................................................................... 156

Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange ........................................................... 156

Video Input Connector [n] Visibility ................................................................................... 157

Video Output Connector [n] Resolution ............................................................................ 157

Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition ............................................................................. 157

Video Presentation DefaultSource .................................................................................... 157

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

83

Video Presentation Priority ............................................................................................... 158

Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode ........................................................................... 158

Video Selfview Default Mode ............................................................................................ 158

Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole ............................................................................. 158

Video Selfview Default PIPPosition ................................................................................... 159

Video Selfview OnCall Duration ........................................................................................ 159

Video Selfview OnCall Mode ............................................................................................ 159

WebEngine settings ...................................................................................................... 160

WebEngine Mode .............................................................................................................. 160

WebEngine RemoteDebugging ......................................................................................... 160

Experimental settings ................................................................................................... 161

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Audio settings

Audio DefaultVolume

Define the default volume for the speakers. The volume is set to this value when you switch on or restart the video conferencing device. Use the controls on the user interface to change the volume while it is running. You may also use API commands (xCommand Audio

Volume) to change the volume while the device is running, and to reset to default value.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: 70

Value space: Integer (0..100)

Range: Select a value between 1 and 100. This corresponds to the dB range from -34.5 dB to 15 dB, in steps of 0.5 dB. If set to 0 the audio is switched off.

Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate

The device can detect clicking noise from a keyboard and automatically attenuate the microphone signal. This is useful when a meeting participant starts typing on the keyboard, because the noise can disturb the other participants. If the participant types on the keyboard and speaks at the same time the microphone signal will not be attenuated.

Requires that the Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled setting is set to On.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: True

Value space: False/True

False: The attenuation of the microphone signal is disabled.

True: The device attenuates the microphone signal if clicking noise from keyboards is detected. If voice or voice + keyboard clicks are detected the microphone signal is not attenuated.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled

The device can detect clicking noise from a keyboard and automatically attenuate the microphone signal. This is useful when a meeting participant starts typing on the keyboard, because the noise can disturb other participants. To enable attenuation on the microphone signal, set the Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate to On.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: True

Value space: False/True

False: The key click detection is disabled.

True: The device will detect clicking noise from keyboards.

Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone

Define which ringtone to use for incoming calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Waves

Value space: Sunrise/Mischief/Ripples/Reflections/Vibes/Delight/Evolve/Playful/Ascent/

Calculation/Mellow/Ringer

Select a ringtone from the list.

Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume

Define the ring volume for incoming calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: 50

Value space: Integer (0..100)

Range: The value goes in steps of 5 from 0 to 100 (from -34.5 dB to 15 dB). Volume 0 =

Off.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

84

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Audio Ultrasound Mode

This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Keep the setting at its default value.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Static

Value space: Dynamic/Static

Dynamic: The device adjusts the ultrasound volume dynamically. The volume may vary up to the maximum level as defined in the Audio Ultrasound Volume MaxVolume setting.

Static: Use only if advised by Cisco.

Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume

This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Set the maximum volume of the ultrasound pairing message.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 70

Value space: Integer (0..70)

Select a value in the specified range. If set to 0, the ultrasound is switched off.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

85 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

BYOD settings

BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled

Use this setting to enable or disable the Touch redirect feature. Touch redirect enables you to control your laptop from a Webex Board screen. You must connect the laptop to the board with an HDMI cable (wired sharing) and a USB-C cable. You can use either a USB-C to USB-C cable or a USB-C to USB-A cable from the board to the laptop.

Touch redirect only works outside of call.

In software version CE9.9.0 Touch redirect is always enabled, and this setting is not available. Also note that this feature is not available on the first generation of boards (Webex

Board 55 and 70, not S-series).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: True

Value space: False/True

False: Touch redirect is disabled.

True: Touch redirect is enabled.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

86 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

CallHistory settings

CallHistory Mode

Determine whether or not information about calls that are placed or received are stored, including missed calls and calls that are not answered (call history). This determines whether or not the calls appear in the Recents list in the user interfaces.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: New entries are not added to the call history.

On: New entries are stored in the call history list.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

87 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Cameras settings

Cameras Camera [n] Backlight DefaultMode

n: 1..1

This configuration turns backlight compensation on or off. Backlight compensation is useful when there is much light behind the persons in the room. Without compensation the persons will easily appear very dark to the far end.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Turn off the camera backlight compensation.

On: Turn on the camera backlight compensation.

Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode

n: 1..1

Define the camera brightness mode.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual

Auto: The camera brightness is automatically set by the device.

Manual: Enable manual control of the camera brightness. The brightness level is set using the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel setting.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel

n: 1..1

Define the brightness level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode to be set to

Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 20

Value space: Integer (1..31)

The brightness level.

Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode

n: 1..1

Define the camera focus mode.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual

Auto: The camera will do single shot auto focusing once a call is connected and when the view has changed.

Manual: Turn the autofocus off and adjust the camera focus manually.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

88 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode

n: 1..1

This setting enables gamma corrections. Gamma describes the nonlinear relationship between image pixels and monitor brightness.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual

Auto: Auto is the default and the recommended setting.

Manual: In manual mode the gamma value is changed with the gamma level setting, ref.

Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level.

Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level

n: 1..1

By setting the Gamma Level you can select which gamma correction table to use. This setting may be useful in difficult lighting conditions, where changes to the brightness setting does not provide satisfactory results. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode to be set to Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..7)

Define the gamma level.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode

The video conferencing device supports the Best overview feature. Best overview uses automatic camera framing to select the best camera view based on where people are in the room. Speaker tracking is not supported.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Off

Auto: Best overview is switched on. The device will detect people in the room and automatically select the best camera framing. Users can switch best overview on or off instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller, but the feature is switched back on after each call so that the device is ready for the next user.

Off: Best overview is switched off.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

89 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Conference settings

Conference ActiveControl Mode

Active control is a feature that allows conference participants to administer a conference on Cisco TelePresence Server or Cisco Meeting Server using the video conferencing device's interfaces. Each user can see the participant list, change video layout, disconnect participants, etc. from the interface. The active control feature is enabled by default, provided that it is supported by the infrastructure (Cisco Unified Communications Manager

(CUCM) version 9.1.2 or newer, Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS) version X8.1 or newer, Cisco Media Server (CMS) version 2.1 or newer). Change this setting if you want to disable the active control features.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Off

Auto: Active control is enabled when supported by the infrastructure.

Off: Active control is disabled.

Conference AutoAnswer Mode

Define the auto answer mode. Use the Conference AutoAnswer Delay setting if you want the device to wait a number of seconds before answering the call, and use the Conference

AutoAnswer Mute setting if you want your microphone to be muted when the call is answered.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: You can answer incoming calls manually by tapping Answer on the Touch controller.

On: The device automatically answers incoming calls, except if you are already in a call.

You can answer or decline incoming calls manually when you are already engaged in a call.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Conference AutoAnswer Mute

Define if the microphone shall be muted when an incoming call is automatically answered.

Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The incoming call will not be muted.

On: The incoming call will be muted when automatically answered.

Conference AutoAnswer Delay

Define how long (in seconds) an incoming call has to wait before it is answered automatically by the device. Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..50)

The auto answer delay (seconds).

Conference CallProtocolIPStack

Select if the device should enable IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack on the call protocol (SIP,

H323).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Dual

Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6

Dual: Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 for the call protocol.

IPv4: When set to IPv4, the call protocol will use IPv4.

IPv6: When set to IPv6, the call protocol will use IPv6.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

90

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Conference DefaultCall Protocol

Define the Default Call Protocol to be used when placing calls from the device.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/H320/H323/Sip/Spark

Auto: Enables auto-selection of the call protocol based on which protocols are available.

If multiple protocols are available, the order of priority is: 1) SIP; 2) H323; 3) H320. If the device cannot register, the auto-selection chooses H323.

H320: All calls are set up as H.320 calls (only applicable if used with Cisco TelePresence

ISDN Link).

H323: All calls are set up as H.323 calls.

Sip: All calls are set up as SIP calls.

Spark: Reserved for Webex registered devices. Do not use.

Conference DefaultCall Rate

Define the Default Call Rate to be used when placing calls from the device.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 10000

Value space: Integer (64..10000)

The default call rate (kbps).

Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout

This setting determines the default duration of a Do Not Disturb session, i.e. the period when incoming calls are rejected and registered as missed calls. The session can be terminated earlier by using the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 60

Value space: Integer (1..1440)

The number of minutes (maximum 1440 minutes = 24 hours) before the Do Not Disturb session times out automatically.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Conference Encryption Mode

Define the conference encryption mode. A padlock with the text "Encryption On" or

"Encryption Off" displays on screen for a few seconds when the conference starts.

NOTE: If the Encryption Option Key is not installed on the device, the encryption mode is always Off.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: BestEffort

Value space: Off/On/BestEffort

Off: The device will not use encryption.

On: The device will only allow calls that are encrypted.

BestEffort: The device will use encryption whenever possible.

> In Point to point calls: If the far end device supports encryption (AES-128), the call will be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.

> In MultiSite calls: In order to have encrypted MultiSite conferences, all sites must support encryption. If not, the conference will be unencrypted.

Conference FarEndControl Mode

Lets you decide if the remote side (far end) should be allowed to select your video sources and control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The far end is not allowed to select your video sources or to control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom).

On: Allows the far end to be able to select your video sources and control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom). You will still be able to control your camera and select your video sources as normal.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

91

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability

Define the far end control (H.224) signal capability mode.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the far end control signal capability.

On: Enable the far end control signal capability.

Conference FarEndMessage Mode

Toggle whether it is allowed to send data between two devices in a point-to-point call, for use with control systems or macros. Works with SIP calls only. This setting will enable/ disable the use of the xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send command.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: It is not possible to send messages between two devices.

On: It is possible to send messages between two devices in a point-to-point call.

Conference MaxReceiveCallRate

Define the maximum receive bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls.

Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference

MaxTotalReceiveCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 10000

Value space: Integer (64..10000)

The maximum receive call rate (kbps).

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Conference MaxTransmitCallRate

Define the maximum transmit bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls.

Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference

MaxTotalTransmitCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 6000

Value space: Integer (64..6000)

The maximum transmitt call rate (kbps).

Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate

This configuration applies when using a device's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to host a multipoint video conference.

Define the maximum overall receive bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly among all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or downspeeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or when a call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed.

The maximum receive bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference

MaxReceiveCallRate setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 10000

Value space: Integer (64..10000)

The maximum receive call rate (kbps).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

92

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate

This configuration applies when using a device's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to host a multipoint video conference.

Define the maximum overall transmit bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly among all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or down-speeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or when a call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed.

The maximum transmit bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference

MaxTransmitCallRate setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 6000

Value space: Integer (64..6000)

The maximum transmit call rate (kbps).

Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode

Define if the microphones shall be unmuted automatically when all calls are disconnected.

In a meeting room or other shared resources this may be done to prepare the device for the next user.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: If muted during a call, let the microphones remain muted after the call is disconnected.

On: Unmute the microphones after the call is disconnected.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Conference Multipoint Mode

Define how to expand a point-to-point video call (a call involving only two parties) into a multipoint conference with more participants (ad hoc conferences). Both the built-in

MultiSite feature, which relies only on local resources, and different solutions based on centralized infrastructure (multipoint control units – MCUs) are available.

The MultiSite feature is an upgrade option and may not be available on all devices. The

MultiSite option key must be installed on the device.

If registered to a Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS), the device can use MultiSite when calling other video devices. If registered to a Cisco Unified

Communications Manager (CUCM) version 8.6.2 or newer, the device can use either a

CUCM conference bridge, or the device's own built-in MultiSite feature. Which option to use, is set-up by CUCM.

In either case, multiparty conferences may be set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote Add).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/CUCMMediaResourceGroupList/MultiSite/Off

Auto: The multipoint method is selected automatically.

Multiparty conferences are set up using the built-in MultiSite feature, provided that the MultiSite option key is installed on the device, and that you are calling another video device (not an MCU). Only the MultiSite host can add participants. This prevents cascaded conferences. If the device doesn't have the MultiSite option key, you cannot call more than one video device on video. You may add one extra participant on audioonly.

Regardless of the MultiSite option key, multiparty conferences may be set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote

Add).

CUCMMediaResourceGroupList: Multiparty conferences are hosted by the CUCM configured conference bridge. This setting is provisioned by CUCM in a CUCM environment, and should never be set manually by the user.

MultiSite: Multiparty conferences are set up using the built-in MultiSite feature, provided that the MultiSite option key is installed on the device. If the device doesn't have the

MultiSite option key, you cannot call more than one device on video. You may add one extra device on audio-only.

Off: You cannot call more than one device on video, but you may add one extra device on audio-only. Multiparty conferences may be set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote Add).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

93

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode

Select whether or not to allow incoming calls when already in a call/conference.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Allow

Value space: Allow/Deny

Allow: You will be notified when someone calls you while you are already in a call.

You can accept the incoming call or not. The ongoing call may be put on hold while answering the incoming call; or you may merge the calls (requires support for multiparty video conferences).

Deny: An incoming call will be rejected if you are already in a call. You will not be notified about the incoming call. However, the call will appear as a missed call in the call history list.

Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold

Define whether or not to continue sharing a presentation after the remote site has put you on hold.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: NoAction

Value space: NoAction/Stop

NoAction: The device will not stop the presentation sharing when put on hold. The presentation will not be shared while you are on hold, but it will continue automatically when the call is resumed.

Stop: The device stops the presentation sharing when the remote site puts you on hold.

The presentation will not continue when the call is resumed.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Conference Presentation RelayQuality

This configuration applies to devices that are using the built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to host a multipoint video conference. When a remote user shares a presentation, the device will transcode the presentation and send it to the other participants in the multipoint conference. The RelayQuality setting specifies whether to give priority to high frame rate or to high resolution for the presentation source.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Sharpness

Value space: Motion/Sharpness

Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher frame rates, typically when there is a lot of motion in the picture.

Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest quality of detailed images and graphics.

Conference VideoBandwidth Mode

Define the conference video bandwidth mode.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Dynamic

Value space: Dynamic/Static

Dynamic: The available transmit bandwidth for the video channels are distributed among the currently active channels. If there is no presentation, the main video channels will use the bandwidth of the presentation channel.

Static: The available transmit bandwidth is assigned to each video channel, even if it is not active.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

94 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

FacilityService settings

FacilityService Service [n] Type

n: 1..5

Up to five different facility services can be supported simultaneously. With this setting you can select what kind of services they are. A facility service is not available unless both the

FacilityService Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Helpdesk

Value space: Catering/Concierge/Emergency/Helpdesk/Security/Transportation/Other

Catering: Select this option for catering services.

Concierge: Select this option for concierge services.

Emergency: Select this option for emergency services.

Helpdesk: Select this option for helpdesk services.

Security: Select this option for security services.

Transportation: Select this option for transportation services.

Other: Select this option for services not covered by the other options.

FacilityService Service [n] Name

n: 1..5

Define the name of the facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported.

A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n] Name and the

FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. The name will show on the facility service call button, which appears when you tap the question mark icon in the top bar. Facility services are available from the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Service 1: "Live Support" Other services: ""

Value space: String (0, 1024)

The name of the facility service.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

FacilityService Service [n] Number

n: 1..5

Define the number (URI or phone number) of the facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService

Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set.

Facility services are available from the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 1024)

The number (URI or phone number) of the facility service.

FacilityService Service [n] CallType

n: 1..5

Define the call type for each facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n]

Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Video

Value space: Audio/Video

Audio: Select this option for audio calls.

Video: Select this option for video calls.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

95

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

H323 settings

H323 Authentication Mode

Define the authenticatin mode for the H.323 profile.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device will not try to authenticate itself to a H.323 Gatekeeper, but will still try a normal registration.

On: If an H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that it requires authentication, the device will try to authenticate itself to the gatekeeper. Requires the H323 Authentication LoginName and H323 Authentication Password settings to be defined on both the device and the

Gatekeeper.

H323 Authentication LoginName

The device sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication

Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way authentication from the device to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the device is authenticated to the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the device will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

The authentication login name.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

H323 Authentication Password

The device sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication

Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way authentication from the device to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the device is authenticated to the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the device will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

The authentication password.

H323 CallSetup Mode

Defines whether to use a Gatekeeper or Direct calling when establishing H.323 calls.

Direct H.323 calls can be made also when H323 CallSetup Mode is set to Gatekeeper.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Gatekeeper

Value space: Direct/Gatekeeper

Direct: You can only make an H.323 call by dialing an IP address directly.

Gatekeeper: The device uses a Gatekeeper to make an H.323 call. When choosing this option, the H323 Gatekeeper Address must also be configured.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

96 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

H323 Encryption KeySize

Define the minimum or maximum key size for the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, which is used when establishing the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption key.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Min1024bit

Value space: Max1024bit/Min1024bit/Min2048bit

Max1024bit: The maximum size is 1024 bit.

Min1024bit: The minimum size is 1024 bit.

Min2048bit: The minimum size is 2048 bit.

H323 Gatekeeper Address

Define the IP address of the Gatekeeper. Requires H323 CallSetup Mode to be set to

Gatekeeper.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

H323 H323Alias E164

The H.323 Alias E.164 defines the address of the device, according to the numbering plan implemented in the H.323 Gatekeeper. The E.164 alias is equivalent to a telephone number, sometimes combined with access codes.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 30)

The H.323 Alias E.164 address. Valid characters are 0-9, * and #.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

H323 H323Alias ID

Define the H.323 Alias ID, which is used to address the device on a H.323 Gatekeeper and will be displayed in the call lists.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 49)

The H.323 Alias ID. Example: "[email protected]", "My H.323 Alias ID"

H323 NAT Mode

The firewall traversal technology creates a secure path through the firewall barrier, and enables proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external video conferencing device (when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router). NOTE: NAT does not work in conjunction with gatekeepers.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Auto/Off/On

Auto: The device will determine if the H323 NAT Address or the real IP address should be used in signaling. This makes it possible to place calls to devices on the LAN as well as devices on the WAN. If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, the real IP address will be used.

Off: The device will signal the real IP address.

On: The device will signal the configured H323 NAT Address instead of its real IP address in Q.931 and H.245. The NAT server address will be shown in the startup-menu as: "My IP Address: 10.0.2.1". If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, H.323 calls cannot be set up.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

97

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

H323 NAT Address

Define the external/global IP address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the router will then be routed to the video conferencing device. Note that NAT cannot be used when registered to a gatekeeper.

In the router, the following ports must be routed to the video conferencing device's IP address:

* Port 1720

* Port 5555-6555

* Port 2326-2487

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.

H323 PortAllocation

This setting affects the H.245 port numbers used for H.323 call signaling.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Dynamic

Value space: Dynamic/Static

Dynamic: The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.

The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls, as some firewalls consider this as a sign of attack. When Dynamic is selected, the H.323 ports used are from 11000 to 20999. Once 20999 is reached they restart again at 11000.

The ports are automatically selected by the system within the given range. Firewall administrators should not try to deduce which ports are used when, as the allocation schema within the mentioned range may change without any further notice.

Static: When set to Static the ports are given within a static predefined range [5555-

6555].

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

98

Administrator Guide

Appendices www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

HttpClient settings

HttpClient Mode

Allow or prohibit communication with an external HTTP(S) server using HTTP(S) requests and responses.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The video conferencing device cannot communicate with an external HTTP(S) server.

On: The video conferencing device is allowed to communicate with an external HTTP(S) server.

HttpClient AllowHTTP

The HttpClient Mode setting is used to allow or prohibit communication with an external

HTTP(S) server. The Mode setting does not distinguish between HTTP and HTTPS. You must use the HttpClient AllowHTTP setting to further allow or prohibit the use of HTTP.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: True

Value space: False/True

False: The video conferencing device can communicate only over HTTPS.

True: The video conferencing device can communicate over both HTTPS and HTTP.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS

You can choose whether or not to allow the video conferencing device to communicate with a server over HTTPS without checking the server's certificate first.

Even if the device is allowed to skip the certificate validation process, it doesn't automatically do it. You must specifically set the AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter in each xCommand HttpClient command for data to be exchanged with the server without certificate validation.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: False

Value space: False/True

False: The device always checks that the HTTPS server has a valid certificate. No communication with the server takes place if the certificate validation fails.

True: The device is allowed to skip the certificate validation process before communicating with the server.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

99 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

HttpFeedback settings

HttpFeedback TlsVerify

This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to an HTTPS server for arbitrary HTTPS communication (refer to the HttpClient Post/Put/Patch/Get/Delete commands). For phone book, provisioning, and external logging servers, see the

Phonebook Server 1 TlsVerify, Provisioning TlsVerify, and Logging External TlsVerify settings.

Before establishing a connection between the device and the HTTPS server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The

CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.

In general, the minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the HTTPS connection is 1.1. There are two exceptions to this rule: 1) For compatibility reasons, the minimum TLS version is 1.0 for devices that are registered to CUCM. 2) Devices registered to the Webex cloud service always use version 1.2.

Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from

CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the old NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate setting was not explicitly set to On.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the HTTPS server.

On: The device checks if the certificate of the HTTPS server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

100 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Logging settings

Logging Debug Wifi

When this option in enabled, the device logs more information about the set-up and maintenance of the Wi-Fi connection between the device and the access point. This may be useful when you are troubleshooting Wi-Fi connection issues. We recommend that this setting is Off if the Wi-Fi connection is working as expected.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Logging only basic Wi-Fi information.

On: Logging a large amount of information about the Wi-Fi connection.

Logging External Mode

Determine whether or not to store the device logs on a remote syslog server. This setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.

You must enter the address of the remote server in the Logging External Server Address setting. Unless otherwise specified in the Logging External Server Port setting, the standard syslog port is used.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Device logs will not be stored on the remote syslog server.

On: Device logs will be stored on the remote syslog server.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Logging External Protocol

Determine which protocol to use toward the remote logging server. You can use either the syslog protocol over TLS (Transport Layer Security), or the syslog protocol in plaintext. For details about the syslog protocol, see RFC 5424.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: SyslogTLS

Value space: Syslog/SyslogTLS

Syslog: Syslog protocol in plain text.

SyslogTLS: Syslog protocol over TLS.

Logging External Server Address

The address of the remote syslog server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

Logging External Server Port

The port that the remote syslog server listens for messages on. If set to 0, the device will use the standard syslog port. The standard syslog port is 514 for syslog, and 6514 for syslog over TLS.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 514

Value space: Integer (0..65535)

The number of the port that the remote syslog server is using. 0 means that the device uses the standard syslog port.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

101

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Logging External TlsVerify

This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to a remote syslog server.

It applies to both regular logging (refer to the Logging External Mode setting) and audit logging (refer to the Security Audit Logging Mode setting).

Before establishing a connection between the device and the syslog server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The

CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.

The minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the syslog connection is 1.1.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the syslog server.

On: The device checks if the certificate of the syslog server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.

Logging Internal Mode

Determine whether or not to store the system logs on the device (local files). These are the files that you get when you download the log bundles from the device. This setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: System logs will not be stored on the device.

On: System logs will be stored on the device.

Administrator Guide

Appendices Maintenance

Logging Mode

Define the logging mode for the device (syslog service). When disabled, the syslog service does not start, and most of the systema and audit logs are not generated. The Historical

Logs and Call Logs are not affected.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the system logging service.

On: Enable the system logging service.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

102 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Macros settings

Macros Mode

Macros allow you to write snippets of JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video conferencing device, thus creating custom behavior. Use of macros is disabled by default, but the first time you open the Macro Editor you will be asked whether to enable use of macros on the device. Use this setting when you want to manually enable, or to permanently disable the use of macros on the device. You can disable the use of macros within the Macro Editor. But this will not permanently disable macros from running, because every time the device is reset the macros will be re-enabled automatically.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Permanently disable the use of macros on this device.

On: Enable the use of macros on this device.

Macros AutoStart

All the macros run in a single process on the video conferencing device, called the macro runtime. It should be running by default, but you can choose to stop and start it manually. If you restart the device, the runtime will automatically start again if auto start is enabled.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The macro runtime will not start automatically after a restart of the device.

On: The macro runtime will start automatically after a restart of the device.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

103 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network settings

Network [n] DNS DNSSEC Mode

n: 1..1

Domain Name System Security extensions (DNSSEC) is a set of extensions to DNS. It is used to authenticate DNS replies for zones that are signed. It will still allow unsigned zones.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable Domain Name System Security Extensions.

On: Enable Domain Name System Security Extensions.

Network [n] DNS Domain Name

n: 1..1

The DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified names.

Example: If the DNS Domain Name is "company.com" and the name to lookup is

"MyVideoSystem", this will result in the DNS lookup "MyVideoSystem.company.com".

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

The DNS domain name.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] DNS Server [m] Address

n: 1..1

m: 1..3

Define the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to three addresses may be specified.

If the network addresses are unknown, contact your administrator or Internet Service

Provider.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.

Network [n] IEEE8021X Mode

n: 1..1

The device can be connected to an IEEE 802.1X LAN network, with a port-based network access control that is used to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The 802.1X authentication is disabled.

On: The 802.1X authentication is enabled.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

104 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] IEEE8021X TlsVerify

n: 1..1

Verification of the server-side certificate of an IEEE802.1x connection against the certificates in the local CA-list when TLS is used. The CA-list must be uploaded to the video conferencing device. This can be done from the web interface.

This setting takes effect only when Network [1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls is enabled (On).

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: When set to Off, TLS connections are allowed without verifying the server-side

X.509 certificate against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no CA-list has been uploaded to the device.

On: When set to On, the server-side X.509 certificate will be validated against the local

CA-list for all TLS connections. Only servers with a valid certificate will be allowed.

Network [n] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate

n: 1..1

Authentication using a private key/certificate pair during an IEEE802.1x connection. The authentication X.509 certificate must be uploaded to the video conferencing device. This can be done from the web interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: When set to Off client-side authentication is not used (only server-side).

On: When set to On the client (video conferencing device) will perform a mutual authentication TLS handshake with the server.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] IEEE8021X Identity

n: 1..1

Define the username for 802.1X authentication.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

The username for 802.1X authentication.

Network [n] IEEE8021X Password

n: 1..1

Define the password for 802.1X authentication.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

The password for 802.1X authentication.

Network [n] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity

n: 1..1

The 802.1X Anonymous ID string is to be used as unencrypted identity with EAP (Extensible

Authentication Protocol) types that support different tunneled identity, like EAP-PEAP and

EAP-TTLS. If set, the anonymous ID will be used for the initial (unencrypted) EAP Identity

Request.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

The 802.1X Anonymous ID string.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

105

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Md5

n: 1..1

Define the Md5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) mode. This is a Challenge Handshake

Authentication Protocol that relies on a shared secret. Md5 is a Weak security.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The EAP-MD5 protocol is disabled.

On: The EAP-MD5 protocol is enabled.

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls

n: 1..1

Define the TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) mode. Authenticates LAN clients without the need for client certificates. Developed by Funk Software and Certicom. Usually supported by Agere Systems, Proxim and Avaya.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The EAP-TTLS protocol is disabled.

On: The EAP-TTLS protocol is enabled.

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Tls

n: 1..1

Enable or disable the use of EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) for IEEE802.1x connections. The EAP-TLS protocol, defined in RFC 5216, is considered one of the most secure EAP standards. LAN clients are authenticated using client certificates.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The EAP-TLS protocol is disabled.

On: The EAP-TLS protocol is enabled.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

106

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Peap

n: 1..1

Define the Peap (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) mode. Authenticates LAN clients without the need for client certificates. Developed by Microsoft, Cisco and RSA

Security.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The EAP-PEAP protocol is disabled.

On: The EAP-PEAP protocol is enabled.

Network [n] IPStack

n: 1..1

Select if the device should use IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack, on the network interface. NOTE:

After changing this setting you may have to wait up to 30 seconds before it takes effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Dual

Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6

Dual: When set to Dual, the network interface can operate on both IP versions at the same time, and can have both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address at the same time.

IPv4: When set to IPv4, the device will use IPv4 on the network interface.

IPv6: When set to IPv6, the device will use IPv6 on the network interface.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] IPv4 Assignment

n: 1..1

Define how the device will obtain its IPv4 address, subnet mask and gateway address.

When using DHCP for address assignment, "01" appended by the MAC address is used as client identifier in DHCP requests.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: DHCP

Value space: Static/DHCP

Static: The addresses must be configured manually using the Network IPv4 Address,

Network IPv4 Gateway and Network IPv4 SubnetMask settings (static addresses).

DHCP: The device addresses are automatically assigned by the DHCP server.

Network [n] IPv4 Address

n: 1..1

Define the static IPv4 network address for the device. Applicable only when Network IPv4

Assignment is set to Static.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address.

Network [n] IPv4 Gateway

n: 1..1

Define the IPv4 network gateway address. Applicable only when the Network IPv4

Assignment is set to Static.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask

n: 1..1

Define the IPv4 network subnet mask. Applicable only when the Network IPv4 Assignment is set to Static.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address.

Network [n] IPv6 Assignment

n: 1..1

Define how the device will obtain its IPv6 address and the default gateway address.

When using DHCPv6 for address assignment, "01" appended by the MAC address is used as client identifier in DHCP requests.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Autoconf

Value space: Static/DHCPv6/Autoconf

Static: The device and gateway IP addresses must be configured manually using the

Network IPv6 Address and Network IPv6 Gateway settings. The options, for example

NTP and DNS server addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6 server. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.

DHCPv6: All IPv6 addresses, including options, will be obtained from a DHCPv6 server.

See RFC 3315 for a detailed description. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting will be ignored.

Autoconf: Enable IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration of the IPv6 network interface. See

RFC 4862 for a detailed description. The options, for example NTP and DNS server addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6 server. The Network

IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

107

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] IPv6 Address

n: 1..1

Define the static IPv6 network address for the device. Applicable only when the Network

IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv6 address including a network mask. Example: 2001:DB8::/48

Network [n] IPv6 Gateway

n: 1..1

Define the IPv6 network gateway address. This setting is only applicable when the Network

IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv6 address.

Network [n] IPv6 DHCPOptions

n: 1..1

Retrieve a set of DHCP options, for example NTP and DNS server addresses, from a

DHCPv6 server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the retrieval of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.

On: Enable the retrieval of a selected set of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] MTU

n: 1..1

Define the Ethernet MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) size. The MTU size must be supported by your network infrastructure. The minimum size is 576 for IPv4 and 1280 for

IPv6.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 1500

Value space: Integer (576..1500)

Set a value for the MTU (bytes).

Network [n] QoS Mode

n: 1..1

The QoS (Quality of Service) is a method which handles the priority of audio, video and data in the network. The QoS settings must be supported by the infrastructure. Diffserv

(Differentiated Services) is a computer networking architecture that specifies a simple, scalable and coarse-grained mechanism for classifying, managing network traffic and providing QoS priorities on modern IP networks.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Diffserv

Value space: Off/Diffserv

Off: No QoS method is used.

Diffserv: When you set the QoS Mode to Diffserv, the Network QoS Diffserv Audio,

Network QoS Diffserv Video, Network QoS Diffserv Data, Network QoS Diffserv

Signalling, Network QoS Diffserv ICMPv6 and Network QoS Diffserv NTP settings are used to prioritize packets.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

108

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Audio

n: 1..1

This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.

Define which priority Audio packets should have in the IP network.

The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The recommended class for Audio is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in doubt, contact your network administrator.

The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..63)

Set the priority of the audio packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Video

n: 1..1

This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.

Define which priority Video packets should have in the IP network. The packets on the presentation channel (shared content) are also in the Video packet category. The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The recommended class for Video is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in doubt, contact your network administrator.

The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..63)

Set the priority of the video packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Data

n: 1..1

This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.

Define which priority Data packets should have in the IP network.

The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The recommended value for Data is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt, contact your network administrator.

The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..63)

Set the priority of the data packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

Network [n] QoS Diffserv Signalling

n: 1..1

This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.

Define which priority Signalling packets that are deemed critical (time-sensitive) for the real-time operation should have in the IP network.

The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The recommended class for Signalling is CS3, which equals the decimal value 24. If in doubt, contact your network administrator.

The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..63)

Set the priority of the signalling packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

109

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6

n: 1..1

This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.

Define which priority ICMPv6 packets should have in the IP network.

The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The recommended value for ICMPv6 is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt, contact your network administrator.

The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..63)

Set the priority of the ICMPv6 packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

Network [n] QoS Diffserv NTP

n: 1..1

This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.

Define which priority NTP packets should have in the IP network.

The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The recommended value for NTP is 0, which means "best effort". If in doubt, contact your network administrator.

The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..63)

Set the priority of the NTP packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] RemoteAccess Allow

n: 1..1

Define which IP addresses (IPv4/IPv6) are allowed for remote access to the device from

SSH/HTTP/HTTPS. Multiple IP addresses are separated by a white space.

A network mask (IP range) is specified by <ip address>/N, where N is 1-32 for IPv4, and N is 1-128 for IPv6. The /N is a common indication of a network mask where the first N bits are set. Thus 192.168.0.0/24 would match any address starting with 192.168.0, since these are the first 24 bits in the address.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.

Network [n] Speed

n: 1..1

Define the Ethernet link speed. We recommend not to change from the default value, which negotiates with the network to set the speed automatically. If you do not use autonegotiation, make sure that the speed you choose is supported by the closest switch in your network infrastructure.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/10half/10full/100half/100full/1000full

Auto: Auto-negotiate link speed.

10half: Force link to 10 Mbps half-duplex.

10full: Force link to 10 Mbps full-duplex.

100half: Force link to 100 Mbps half-duplex.

100full: Force link to 100 Mbps full-duplex.

1000full: Force link to 1 Gbps full-duplex.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

110

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Network [n] TrafficControl Mode

n: 1..1

Define the network traffic control mode to decide how to control the video packets transmission speed.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Transmit video packets at link speed.

On: Transmit video packets at maximum 20 Mbps. Can be used to smooth out bursts in the outgoing network traffic.

Network [n] VLAN Voice Mode

n: 1..1

Define the VLAN voice mode. The VLAN Voice Mode will be set to Auto automatically if you have Cisco UCM (Cisco Unified Communications Manager) as provisioning infrastructure.

Note that Auto mode will NOT work if the NetworkServices CDP Mode setting is Off.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual/Off

Auto: The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), if available, assigns an id to the voice VLAN. If

CDP is not available, VLAN is not enabled.

Manual: The VLAN ID is set manually using the Network VLAN Voice VlanId setting. If

CDP is available, the manually set value will be overruled by the value assigned by CDP.

Off: VLAN is not enabled.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId

n: 1..1

Define the VLAN voice ID. This setting will only take effect if Network VLAN Voice Mode is set to Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 1

Value space: Integer (1..4094)

Set the VLAN voice ID.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

111 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices settings

NetworkServices CDP Mode

Enable or disable the CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) daemon. Enabling CDP will make the device report certain statistics and device identifiers to a CDP-enabled switch. If CDP is disabled, the Network VLAN Voice Mode: Auto setting will not work.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The CDP daemon is disabled.

On: The CDP daemon is enabled.

NetworkServices H323 Mode

Define whether the device should be able to place and receive H.323 calls or not.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.

On: Enable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices HTTP Mode

Define whether or not to allow access to the device using the HTTP or HTTPS (HTTP

Secure) protocols. Note that the device's web interface use HTTP or HTTPS. If this setting is switched Off, you cannot use the web interface.

For additional security (encryption and decryption of requests and pages that are returned by the web server), allow only HTTPS.

Note: The default value is HTTP+HTTPS for devices that have been upgraded to CE9.4 (or later) from an earlier software version, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: HTTPS (changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS in CE9.4)

Value space: Off/HTTP+HTTPS/HTTPS

Off: Access to the device not allowed via HTTP or HTTPS.

HTTP+HTTPS: Access to the device allowed via both HTTP and HTTPS.

HTTPS: Access to the device allowed via HTTPS, but not via HTTP.

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName

This is the username part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.

Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 80)

The authentication login name.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

112 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password

This is the password part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.

Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

The authentication password.

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode

You can configure a device that is registered to the Cisco Webex cloud service to use a proxy server for HTTPS and WebSocket traffic. The HTTP proxy for Cisco Webex can be set up manually, it can be auto-configured (PACUrl), fully automated (WPAD), or it can be turned off.

If the device is registered to an on-premise service such as CUCM or VCS, keep this setting Off.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD

Manual: Enter the address of the proxy server in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy

URL setting. Optionally, also add the HTTP proxy login name and password in the

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName/Password settings.

Off: The HTTP proxy mode is turned off.

PACUrl: The HTTP proxy is auto-configured. You must enter the URL for the PAC (Proxy

Auto Configuration) script in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl setting.

WPAD: With WPAD (Web Proxy Auto Discovery) the HTTP proxy is fully automated and auto-configured.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url

Set the URL of the HTTP proxy server. Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy

Mode is set to Manual.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The URL of the HTTP proxy server.

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl

Set the URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script. Requires that the

NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to PACUrl.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script.

NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode

Define the support for OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) responder services. The

OCSP feature allows users to enable OCSP instead of certificate revocation lists (CRLs) to check the certificate status.

For any outgoing HTTPS connection, the OCSP responder is queried of the status. If the corresponding certificate has been revoked, then the HTTPS connection will not be used.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable OCSP support.

On: Enable OCSP support.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

113

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL

Define the URL of the OCSP responder (server) that will be used to check the certificate status.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid URL.

NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion

Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: TLSv1.1

Value space: TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2

TLSv1.1: Support of TLS version 1.1 or higher.

TLSv1.2: Support of TLS version 1.2 or higher.

NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity

The HTTP Strict Transport Security header lets a web site inform the browser that it should never load the site using HTTP and should automatically convert all attempts to access the site using HTTP to HTTPS requests instead.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The HTTP strict transport security feature is disabled.

On: The HTTP strict transport security feature is enabled.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate

When the video conferencing device connects to an HTTPS client (like a web browser), the client can be asked to present a certificate to the video conferencing device to identify itself.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Do not verify client certificates.

On: Requires the client to present a certificate that is signed by a trusted Certificate

Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the device in advance.

NetworkServices NTP Mode

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the device's time and date to a reference time server. The time server will be queried regularly for time updates.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual/Off

Auto: The device will use an NTP server for time reference. As default, the server address will be obtained from the network's DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not used, or if the DHCP server does not provide an NTP server address, the NTP server address that is specified in the NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address setting will be used.

Manual: The device will use the NTP server that is specified in the NetworkServices NTP

Server [n] Address setting for time reference.

Off: The device will not use an NTP server. The NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address setting will be ignored.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

114

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address

n: 1..3

The address of the NTP server that will be used when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to

Manual, and when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to Auto and no address is supplied by a DHCP server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: "0.tandberg.pool.ntp.org"

Value space: String (0, 255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Key

n: 1..3

To make sure that the NTP information comes from a trusted source, the video conferencing device must know the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses. Use the NetworkServices

NTP Server [n] Key and NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId settings for the key and ID respectively.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 2045)

The key, which is part of the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses.

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId

n: 1..3

To make sure that the NTP information comes from a trusted source, the video conferencing device must know the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses. Use the NetworkServices

NTP Server [n] Key and NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId settings for the key and ID respectively.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 10)

The ID, which is part of the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyAlgorithn

n: 1..3

Choose the authentication hash function that the NTP server uses, and that the video conferencing device must use to authenticate the time messages.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: None/SHA1/SHA256

None: The NTP server doesn't use a hash function.

SHA1: The NTP server uses the SHA-1 hash function.

SHA256: The NTP server uses the SHA-256 hash function (from the SHA-2 family of hash functions).

NetworkServices SIP Mode

Define whether the device should be able to place and receive SIP calls or not.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.

On: Enable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

115

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices SMTP Mode

You can set up the device to use SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) for sending email from the device to a mail server for relaying. This is required if you want to allow users to send their whiteboards and presentations via email to people inside or outside their organization.

If the device is set up for encrypted communication (see the NetworkServices SMTP

Security setting), the device only allows connections where the SMTP server's certificate is validated. There is no option for ignoring the certificate check.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable SMTP (and email) support.

On: Enable SMTP support for sending email.

NetworkServices SMTP Server

This is the address of the SMTP server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

NetworkServices SMTP Port

This port is used for outgoing emails from the device to the SMTP server.

Set a port number based on the encryption setting (NetworkServices SMTP Security) and the requirements of the SMTP server. Do not use the default value.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..65535)

The port used for outgoing emails from the device.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices SMTP Username

This is the username part of the credentials that are used to authenticate the device with the SMTP server. This setting may be required by the SMTP server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

A valid username.

NetworkServices SMTP Password

This is the password part of the credentials that are used to authenticate the device with the SMTP server. This setting may be required by the SMTP server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid password.

NetworkServices SMTP From

When sending an email message from this device, this is the name of the mailbox that the message is sent from.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 255)

An email address that meets the requirements of the SMTP server.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

116

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices SMTP Security

Choose if and how to secure the communication between the device and the SMTP server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: None

Value space: None/StartTls/Tls

None: Connect to the SMTP server without encryption.

StartTls: Initially connect to the SMTP server without encryption, and then send a

STARTTLS command to upgrade to an encrypted connection (TLS).

Tls: Connect to the SMTP server over TLS (Transport Layer Security).

NetworkServices SNMP Mode

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used in network management systems to monitor network-attached devices (routers, servers, switches, projectors, etc) for conditions that warrant administrative attention. SNMP exposes management data in the form of variables on the managed devices, which describe the device configuration. These variables can then be queried (set to ReadOnly) and sometimes set (set to ReadWrite) by managing applications.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ReadOnly

Value space: Off/ReadOnly/ReadWrite

Off: Disable the SNMP network service.

ReadOnly: Enable the SNMP network service for queries only.

ReadWrite: Enable the SNMP network service for both queries and commands.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices SNMP Host [n] Address

n: 1..3

Define the address of up to three SNMP Managers.

The device's SNMP Agent (in the codec) responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC program etc.), for example about device location and device contact. SNMP traps are not supported.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName

Define the name of the Network Services SNMP Community. SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a password (case sensitive) in order to receive a response from the SNMP Agent in the device. The default password is "public". If you have the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite (TMS) you must make sure the same SNMP Community is configured there too. NOTE: The SNMP

Community password is case sensitive.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

The SNMP community name.

NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact

Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Contact.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

The name of the SNMP system contact.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

117

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation

Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Location.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

The name of the SNMP system location.

NetworkServices SSH Mode

The SSH (or Secure Shell) protocol can provide secure encrypted communication between the video conferencing device and your local computer.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The SSH protocol is disabled.

On: The SSH protocol is enabled.

NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm

Choose the cryptographic algorithm that shall be used for the SSH host key. Choices are RSA (Rivest–Shamir–Adleman) with 2048 bits keysize, ECDSA (Elliptic Curve Digital

Signature Algorithm) with NIST curve P-384, and EdDSA (Edwards-curve Digital Signature

Algorithm) with ed25519 signature schema.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: RSA

Value space: ECDSA/RSA/ed25519

ECDSA: Use the ECDSA algorithm (nist-384p).

RSA: Use the RSA algorithm (2048 bits).

ed25519: Use the ed25519 algorithm.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey

Secure Shell (SSH) public key authentication can be used to access the device.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The SSH public key is not allowed.

On: The SSH public key is allowed.

NetworkServices UPnP Mode

Fully disable UPnP (Universal Plug and Play), or enable UPnP for a short time period after the video conferencing device has been switched on or restarted.

The default operation is that UPnP is enabled when you switch on or restart the video conferencing device. Then UPnP is automatically disabled after the timeout period that is defined in the NetworkServices UPnP Timeout setting.

When UPnP is enabled, the device advertises its presence on the network. The advertisement permits a Touch controller to discover video conferencing devices automatically, and you do not need to manually enter the device's IP address in order to pair the Touch controller.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: UPnP is disabled. The video conferencing device does not advertise its presence, and you have to enter the device's IP address manually in order to pair a Touch controller to the device.

On: UPnP is enabled. The video conferencing device advertises its presence until the timeout period expires.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

118

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices UPnP Timeout

Define for how many seconds UPnP shall stay enabled after the device is switched on or restarted. The NetworkServices UPnP Mode setting must be On for this setting to take any effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 600

Value space: Integer (0..3600)

Range: Select a value between 0 and 3600 seconds.

NetworkServices Websocket

It is possible to interact with the API of the device over the WebSocket protocol, both the insecure and secure versions (ws and wss). A WebSocket is tied to HTTP, so that also HTTP or HTTPS must be enabled before you can use WebSockets (see the NetworkServices

HTTP Mode setting).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: FollowHTTPService/Off

FollowHTTPService: Communication over the WebSocket protocol is allowed when

HTTP or HTTPS is enabled.

Off: Communication over the WebSocket protocol is not allowed.

NetworkServices WelcomeText

Choose which information the user should see when logging on to the device through SSH.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The welcome text is: Login successful

On: The welcome text is: Welcome to <system name>; Software version; Software release date; Login successful.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

NetworkServices Wifi Allowed

Devices that have a built-in Wi-Fi adapter, can connect to the network either via Ethernet or Wi-Fi. Both Ethernet and Wi-Fi are allowed by default, and the user can choose which one to use from the user interface. With this setting, the administrator can disable Wi-Fi configuration, so that it cannot be set up from the user interface.

The devices support the following standards: IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE

802.11n, and IEEE 802.11ac. The device supports the following security protocols: WPA-

PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-MSCHAPv2,

EAP-GTC, and open networks (not secured).

If the PID (Product ID), found on the rating label at the rear of the device, contains the letters

NR (No Radio) the device does not support Wi-Fi.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: True

Value space: False/True

False: Wi-Fi cannot be used. You must connect to the network via Ethernet.

True: Both Ethernet and Wi-Fi are allowed.

NetworkServices Wifi Enabled

Provided that the device is allowed to connect to the network via Wi-Fi (see the

NetworkServices WIFI Allowed setting), you can use this setting to enable and disable Wi-

Fi.

You cannot use Ethernet and Wi-Fi at the same time. If you try to configure Wi-Fi while an

Ethernet cable is connected, you must unplug the Ethernet cable to proceed. If you connect an Ethernet cable while connected to Wi-Fi, Ethernet will take precedence. If you unplug the

Ethernet cable, the device will automatically connect to the last connected Wi-Fi network, if available.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: True

Value space: False/True

False: Wi-Fi is disabled.

True: Wi-Fi is enabled.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

119

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode

Enable or disable the device's XML API. For security reasons this may be disabled. Disabling the XML API will limit the remote manageability with for example TMS, which no longer will be able to connect to the device.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The XML API is disabled.

On: The XML API is enabled.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

120 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Peripherals settings

Peripherals Profile Cameras

Define the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the device. This information is used by the device's diagnostics service. If the number of connected cameras does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 0

Value space: 0

0: The number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the device.

Peripherals Profile ControlSystems

Define if a third-party control system, for example Crestron or AMX, is expected to be connected to the video conferencing device. This information is used by the video conferencing device's diagnostics service. If the number of connected control systems does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency.

Such information is currently not available on this product.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: NotSet

Value space: NotSet

NotSet: No check for a third-party control system is performed.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

121 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Phonebook settings

Phonebook Server [n] ID

n: 1..1

Define a name for the external phone book.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

The name for the external phone book.

Phonebook Server [n] Pagination

n: 1..1

Configure if the phonebook server supports pagination (paging) or not. Pagination means that the server supports consecutive searches, and these searches can be relative to an offset. This allows the user interface to perform as many consecutive searches as required to get the complete search result.

If Pagination is Disabled the device does a single search and returns a maximum of 100 entries in the search result. It is not possible to scroll to any further search results beyond that.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Enabled

Value space: Disabled/Enabled

Disabled: The phonebook server does not support pagination. The device does a single search, and the maximum number of entries in the search result is 100.

Enabled: The phonebook server supports pagination.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Phonebook Server [n] TlsVerify

This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to an external phone book server via HTTPS.

Before establishing a connection between the device and the HTTPS server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The

CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.

In general, the minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the HTTPS connection is 1.1. There are two exceptions to this rule: 1) For compatibility reasons, the minimum TLS version is 1.0 for devices that are registered to CUCM. 2) Devices registered to the Webex cloud service always use version 1.2.

Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from

CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the old NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate setting was not explicitly set to On.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the HTTPS server.

On: The device checks if the certificate of the HTTPS server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

122

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Phonebook Server [n] Type

n: 1..1

Select the phonebook server type.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/CUCM/Spark/TMS/VCS

Off: Do not use a phonebook.

CUCM: The phonebook is located on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager.

Spark: The phonebook is located in the Cisco Webex cloud service.

TMS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite server.

VCS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication

Server.

Phonebook Server [n] URL

n: 1..1

Define the address (URL) to the external phone book server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid address (URL) to the phone book server.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

123 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Provisioning settings

Provisioning Connectivity

This setting controls how the device discovers whether it should request an internal or external configuration from the provisioning server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Auto

Value space: Internal/External/Auto

Internal: Request internal configuration.

External: Request external configuration.

Auto: Automatically discover using NAPTR queries whether internal or external configurations should be requested. If the NAPTR responses have the "e" flag, external configurations will be requested. Otherwise internal configurations will be requested.

Provisioning ExternalManager Address

Define the IP Address or DNS name of the external manager / provisioning system.

If an External Manager Address (and Path) is configured, the device will send a message to this address when starting up. When receiving this message the external manager / provisioning system can return configurations/commands to the unit as a result.

When using CUCM or TMS provisioning, the DHCP server can be set up to provide the external manager address automatically (DHCP Option 242 for TMS, and DHCP Option

150 for CUCM). An address set in the Provisioning ExternalManager Address setting will override the address provided by DHCP.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress

Only applicable when the device is provisioned by Cisco Unified Communication Manager

(CUCM) and an alternate CUCM is available for redundancy. Define the address of the alternate CUCM. If the main CUCM is not available, the device will be provisioned by the alternate CUCM. When the main CUCM is available again, the device will be provisioned by this CUCM.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol

Define whether to use the HTTP (unsecure communication) or HTTPS (secure communication) protocol when sending requests to the external manager / provisioning system.

The selected protocol must be enabled in the NetworkServices HTTP Mode setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: HTTP

Value space: HTTPS/HTTP

HTTPS: Send requests via HTTPS.

HTTP: Send requests via HTTP.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

124

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Provisioning ExternalManager Path

Define the Path to the external manager / provisioning system. This setting is required when several management services reside on the same server, i.e. share the same External

Manager address.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid path to the external manager or provisioning system.

Provisioning ExternalManager Domain

Define the SIP domain for the VCS provisioning server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid domain name.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Provisioning Mode

It is possible to configure a device using a provisioning system (external manager). This allows video conferencing network administrators to manage many devices simultaneously.

With this setting you choose which type of provisioning system to use. Provisioning can also be switched off. Contact your provisioning system provider/representative for more information.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Auto

Value space: Off/Auto/CUCM/Edge/Webex/TMS/VCS

Off: The device is not configured by a provisioning system.

Auto: The provisioning server is automatically selected as set up in the DHCP server.

CUCM: Push configurations to the device from CUCM (Cisco Unified Communications

Manager).

Edge: Push configurations to the device from CUCM (Cisco Unified Communications

Manager). The device connects to CUCM via the Expressway infrastructure. In order to register over Expressway the encryption option key must be installed on the device.

Webex: Push configurations to the device from the Cisco Webex cloud service.

TMS: Push configurations to the device from TMS (Cisco TelePresence Management

System).

VCS: Push configurations to the device from VCS (Cisco TelePresence Video

Communication Server).

Provisioning LoginName

This is the username part of the credentials used to authenticate the device with the provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 80)

A valid username.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

125

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Provisioning Password

This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate the device with the provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 64)

A valid password.

Provisioning TlsVerify

This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to a provisioning server via

HTTPS.

Before establishing a connection between the device and the HTTPS server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The

CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.

In general, the minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the HTTPS connection is 1.1. There are two exceptions to this rule: 1) For compatibility reasons, the minimum TLS version is 1.0 for devices that are registered to CUCM. 2) Devices registered to the Webex cloud service always use version 1.2.

Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from

CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the old NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate setting was not explicitly set to On.

The certificate check is always performed, regardless of this setting, if the device is provisioned from the Cisco Webex cloud service or from CUCM via Expressway (also known as MRA or Edge).

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the HTTPS server.

On: The device checks if the certificate of the HTTPS server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

126

Administrator Guide

Appendices www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Proximity settings

Proximity Mode

Determine whether the device will emit ultrasound pairing messages or not.

When the device emits ultrasound, Proximity clients can detect that they are close to the device. In order to use a client, at least one of the Proximity services must be enabled (refer to the Proximity Services settings). In general, Cisco recommends enabling all the Proximity services.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device does not emit ultrasound, and Proximity services cannot be used.

On: The device emits ultrasound, and Proximity clients can detect that they are close to the device. Enabled Proximity services can be used.

Proximity Services CallControl

Enable or disable basic call control features on Proximity clients. When this setting is enabled, you are able to control a call using a Proximity client (for example dial, mute, adjust volume and hang up). This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).

Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Disabled

Value space: Enabled/Disabled

Enabled: Call control from a Proximity client is enabled.

Disabled: Call control from a Proximity client is disabled.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients

Enable or disable content sharing from Proximity clients. When this setting is enabled, you can share content from a Proximity client wirelessly on the device, e.g. share your laptop screen. This service is supported by laptops (OS X and Windows). Proximity Mode must be

On for this setting to take any effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Enabled

Value space: Enabled/Disabled

Enabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is enabled.

Disabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is disabled.

Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients

Enable or disable content sharing to Proximity clients. When enabled, Proximity clients will receive the presentation from the device. You can zoom in on details, view previous content and take snapshots. This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).

Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Disabled

Value space: Enabled/Disabled

Enabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is enabled.

Disabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is disabled.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

127 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

RoomAnalytics settings

RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode

The device can estimate the stationary ambient noise level (background noise level) in the room. The result is reported in the RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level dBA status. The status is updated when a new ambient noise level is detected.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

On: The device regularly estimates the stationary ambient noise level.

Off: The device doesn't estimate the stationary ambient noise level.

RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall

By using face detection, the device has the capability to find how many persons are in the room. By default, the device only counts people when in a call, or when displaying the selfview picture.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device counts people only when the device is in a call, or when self-view is on.

On: The device counts people as long as the device is not in standby mode. This includes outside of call, even if self-view is off.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector

The device has the capability to find whether or not people are present in the room, and report the result in the RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence status. The feature is based on ultrasound. Read the status description for more details.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Information about the presence of people is not reported in the device's status.

On: Information about the presence of people is reported in the device's status.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

128 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

RoomReset settings

RoomReset Control

This setting is for use with control systems or macros. Macros allow you to write snippets of

JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video conferencing device, thus creating custom behavior.

When a room has been idle for some time the video conferencing device can send an event to indicate that the room is ready to be reset.

The events that are sent when this setting is enabled are:

*e RoomReset SecondsToReset: 30

** end

*e RoomReset Reset

** end

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: CameraPositionsOnly/Off/On

CameraPositionsOnly: Not applicable.

Off: No RoomReset events will be sent.

On: The room reset control is enabled and RoomReset events will be sent.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

129 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

RTP settings

RTP Ports Range Start

Define the first port in the range of RTP ports.

As default, the device is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2487 for RTP and RTCP media data. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled, and 20 when

RTP Video Ports Range is enabled.

If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports

Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports

Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.

A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 2326

Value space: Integer (1024..65438)

Set the first port in the range of RTP ports. The value must be an even number.

RTP Ports Range Stop

Define the last port in the range of RTP ports.

As default, the device is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2487 for RTP and RTCP media data. If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled the device is using the ports in the range

1024 to 65436. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled, and

20 when RTP Video Ports Range is enabled.

If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports

Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports

Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.

A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 2487

Value space: Integer (1121..65535)

Set the last port in the range of RTP ports. The value must be an odd number. If you enter an even value, +1 will be automatically applied.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

RTP Video Ports Range Start

Define the first port in the range of RTP video ports.

If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between

1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.

If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports

Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports

Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.

A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65454)

Set the first port in the range of RTP video ports.

RTP Video Ports Range Stop

Define the last port in the range of RTP video ports.

If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between

1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.

If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports

Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports

Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.

A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65535)

Set the last port in the range of RTP video ports.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

130

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Security settings

Security Audit Logging Mode

Define where to record or transmit the audit logs. The audit logs are sent to a syslog server.

This setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.

When using the External or ExternalSecure mode you must enter the address of the audit server in the Security Audit Server Address setting.

Requires user role: AUDIT

Default value: Internal

Value space: External/ExternalSecure/Internal/Off

External: The device sends the audit logs to an external syslog server. The syslog server must support UDP.

ExternalSecure: The device sends encrypted audit logs to an external syslog server that is verified by a certificate in the Audit CA list. The Audit CA list file must be uploaded to the device using the web interface. The common_name parameter of a certificate in the

CA list must match the IP address or DNS name of the syslog server, and the secure

TCP server must be set up to listen for secure (TLS) TCP Syslog messages.

Internal: The device records the audit logs to internal logs, and rotates logs when they are full.

Off: No audit logging is performed.

Security Audit OnError Action

Define what happens when the connection to the syslog server is lost. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to ExternalSecure.

Requires user role: AUDIT

Default value: Ignore

Value space: Halt/Ignore

Halt: If a halt condition is detected the device is rebooted and only the auditor is allowed to operate the unit until the halt condition has passed. When the halt condition has passed the audit logs are re-spooled to the syslog server. Halt conditions are: A network breach (no physical link), no syslog server running (or incorrect address or port to the syslog server), TLS authentication failed (if in use), local backup (re-spooling) log full.

Ignore: The device will continue its normal operation, and rotate internal logs when full.

When the connection is restored it will again send its audit logs to the syslog server.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Security Audit Server Address

Set the IP address or DNS name of the syslog server that the audit logs are sent to.

This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to External or

ExternalSecure.

Requires user role: AUDIT

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or DNS name.

Security Audit Server Port

The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define the port of the syslog server that the device shall send its audit logs to. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Server

PortAssignment is set to Manual.

Requires user role: AUDIT

Default value: 514

Value space: Integer (0..65535)

Set the audit server port.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

131

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Security Audit Server PortAssignment

The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. You can define how the port number of the external syslog server will be assigned. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit

Logging Mode is set to External or ExternalSecure. To see which port number is used you can check the Security Audit Server Port status. Navigate to Setup > Status on the web interface or; if on a command line interface, run the command xStatus Security Audit Server

Port.

Requires user role: AUDIT

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Manual

Auto: Will use UDP port number 514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to

External. Will use TCP port number 6514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to

ExternalSecure.

Manual: Will use the port value defined in the Security Audit Server Port setting.

Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime

Define how long the device will lock out a user after failed login to a web or SSH session.

Restart the device for any change to this setting to take effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 60

Value space: Integer (0..10000)

Set the lockout time (minutes).

Security Session InactivityTimeout

Define how long the device will accept inactivity from the user before he is automatically logged out from a web or SSH session.

Restart the device for any change to this setting to take effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..10000)

Set the inactivity timeout (minutes); or select 0 when inactivity should not enforce automatic logout.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Security Session MaxFailedLogins

Define the maximum number of failed login attempts per user for a web or SSH session. If the user exceeded the maximum number of attempts the user will be locked out. 0 means that there is no limit for failed logins.

Restart the device for any change to this setting to take effect.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..10)

Set the maximum number of failed login attempts per user.

Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser

The maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user is 20 sessions.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 20

Value space: Integer (1..20)

Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user.

Security Session MaxTotalSessions

The maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total is 20 sessions.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 20

Value space: Integer (1..20)

Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

132

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Security Session ShowLastLogon

When logging in to the device using SSH you will see the UserId, time and date of the last session that did a successful login.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

On: Show information about the last session.

Off: Do not show information about the last session.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

133 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

SerialPort settings

SerialPort Mode

Enable/disable the serial port.

This setting is not available for the first generation of boards (Webex Board 55 and Webex

Board 70).

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable the serial port.

On: Enable the serial port.

SerialPort BaudRate

Set the baud rate (data transmission rate, bits per second) for the serial port.

Other connection parameters for the serial port are: Data bits: 8; Parity: None; Stop bits: 1;

Flow control: None.

This setting is not available for the first generation of boards (Webex Board 55 and Webex

Board 70).

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 115200

Value space: 115200

Choose a baud rate from the baud rates listed (bps).

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SerialPort LoginRequired

Define if login shall be required when connecting to the serial port.

This setting is not available for the first generation of boards (Webex Board 55 and Webex

Board 70).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The user can access the device via the serial port without any login.

On: Login is required when connecting to the device via the serial port.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

134 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

SIP settings

SIP ANAT

ANAT (Alternative Network Address Types) enables media negotiation for multiple addresses and address types, as specified in RFC 4091.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable ANAT.

On: Enable ANAT.

SIP Authentication UserName

This is the username part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 128)

A valid username.

SIP Authentication Password

This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 128)

A valid password.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SIP DefaultTransport

Select the transport protocol to be used over the LAN.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/TCP/Tls/UDP

TCP: The device will always use TCP as the default transport method.

UDP: The device will always use UDP as the default transport method.

Tls: The device will always use TLS as the default transport method. For TLS connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the device. If no such CA-list is available on the device then anonymous Diffie Hellman will be used.

Auto: The device will try to connect using transport protocols in the following order: TLS,

TCP, UDP.

SIP DisplayName

When configured the incoming call will report the display name instead of the SIP URI.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 550)

The name to be displayed instead of the SIP URI.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

135

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

SIP Ice DefaultCandidate

The ICE protocol needs some time to reach a conclusion about which media route to use

(up to the first 5 seconds of a call). During this period media for the device will be sent to the Default Candidate as defined in this setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Host

Value space: Host/Rflx/Relay

Host: Send media to the device's private IP address.

Rflx: Send media to the device's public IP address, as seen by the TURN server.

Relay: Send media to the IP address and port allocated on the TURN server.

SIP Ice Mode

ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment, RFC 5245) is a NAT traversal solution that the devices can use to discover the optimized media path. Thus the shortest route for audio and video is always secured between the devices.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Off/On

Auto: ICE is enabled if a TURN server is provided, otherwise ICE is disabled.

Off: ICE is disabled.

On: ICE is enabled.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SIP Line

When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) the device may be part of a shared line. This means that several devices share the same directory number. The different devices sharing the same number receive status from the other appearances on the line as defined in RFC 4235.

Note that shared lines are set up by CUCM, not by the device. Therefore do not change this setting manually; CUCM pushes this information to the device when required.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Private

Value space: Private/Shared

Shared: The device is part of a shared line and is therefore sharing its directory number with other devices.

Private: This device is not part of a shared line.

SIP ListenPort

Turn on or off the listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports. If turned off, the device will only be reachable through a SIP Proxy (CUCM or VCS). As a security measure, SIP ListenPort should be Off when the device is registered to a SIP Proxy.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Off/On

Auto: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is automatically turned off if the device is registered to a SIP Proxy; otherwise it is turned on.

Off: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned off.

On: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned on.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

136 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

SIP Mailbox

When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) you may be offered the option of having a private voice mailbox.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 255)

A valid number or address. Leave the string empty if you do not have a voice mailbox.

SIP MinimumTLSVersion

Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: TLSv1.0

Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2

TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.

TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.

TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.

SIP PreferredIPSignaling

Define the preferred IP version for signaling (audio, video, data). Only applicable when both

Network IPStack and Conference CallProtocolIPStack are set to Dual, and the network does not have a mechanism for choosing the preferred IP version. It also determines the priority of the A/AAAA lookups in DNS, so that the preferred IP version is used for registration.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: IPv4

Value space: IPv4/IPv6

IPv4: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv4.

IPv6: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv6.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SIP Proxy [n] Address

n: 1..4

The Proxy Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy. It is possible to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP and

UDP but another one can be provided.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.

SIP TlsVerify

Before establishing a connection over SIP TLS, the device checks if the certificate of the peer is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA must be included in the CA list that is manually uploaded to the device using the web interface or API. The list of preinstalled certificates is not used to validate certificates for SIP TLS connections.

Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from

CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the setting was not explicitly set to On.

Use the SIP MinimumTLSVersion setting to specify which TLS versions are allowed.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the peer. The SIP TLS connection is established anyway.

On: The device checks if the certificate of the peer can be trusted. If not, the SIP TLS connection is not established.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

137

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

SIP Turn DiscoverMode

Define the discover mode to enable/disable the application to search for available Turn servers in DNS. Before making calls, the device will test if port allocation is possible.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: Set to Off to disable discovery mode.

On: When set to On, the device will search for available Turn servers in DNS, and before making calls the device will test if port allocation is possible.

SIP Turn DropRflx

DropRflx will make the device force media through the Turn relay, unless the remote device is on the same network.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Disable DropRflx.

On: The device will force media through the Turn relay when the remote device is on another network.

SIP Turn Server

Define the address of the TURN (Traversal Using Relay NAT) server. It is used as a media relay fallback and it is also used to discover the device's own public IP address.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The preferred format is DNS SRV record (e.g. _turn._udp.<domain>), or it can be a valid

IPv4 or IPv6 address.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SIP Turn UserName

Define the username needed for accessing the TURN server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 128)

A valid username.

SIP Turn Password

Define the password needed for accessing the TURN server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 128)

A valid password.

SIP Type

Enables SIP extensions and special behavior for a vendor or provider.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Standard

Value space: Standard/Cisco

Standard: Use this when registering to standard SIP Proxy (tested with Cisco

TelePresence VCS).

Cisco: Use this when registering to Cisco Unified Communication Manager.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

138

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

SIP URI

The SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) is the address that is used to identify the device.

The URI is registered and used by the SIP services to route inbound calls to the device. The

SIP URI syntax is defined in RFC 3261.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

An address (URI) that is compliant with the SIP URI syntax.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

139 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Standby settings

Standby Control

Define whether the device should go into standby mode or not.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device will not enter standby mode.

On: The device will enter standby mode when the Standby Delay has timed out.

Standby Delay

Define how long (in minutes) the device shall be in idle mode before it goes into standby mode. Requires the Standby Control to be enabled.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 4

Value space: Integer (1..480)

Set the standby delay (minutes).

Standby Signage Audio

By default, a device does not play out audio in digital signage mode even if the web page has audio. You can use this setting to override the default behavior.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device does not play out audio with the web page.

On: If the web page has audio, the device plays it out. The volume follows the volume setting of the device.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Standby Signage InteractionMode

By default, a user cannot interact with a digital signage web page. You can use this setting to enable the ability to interact with the web page.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: NonInteractive

Value space: Interactive/NonInteractive

Interactive: It's possible to interact with the web page.

NonInteractive: It's not possible to interact with the web page.

Standby Signage Mode

Content from a URL (a web page) can replace the traditional half-wake background image and information. This feature is called digital signage. Users can interact with the web page, for example click on a link or enter text in a form.

The use of digital signage does not prevent the device from entering standby the normal way. Therefore, the Standby Delay setting determines for how long the digital signage is shown before the device goes into standby.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Digital signage is not enabled on the device.

On: Digital signage is enabled and replaces the device's half-wake mode, provided that also the WebEngine Mode setting is On.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

140

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Standby Signage RefreshInterval

You can use this setting to force a web page to refresh at regular intervals. This is useful for web pages that are not able to refresh themselves. It is not recommended to set a refresh interval with the interactive mode.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..1440)

The number of seconds between each web page refresh. The value of 0 means that the web page is never forced to refresh.

Standby Signage Url

Set the URL of the web page you want to display on the screen (digital signage). If the length of the URL is 0, the device retains normal half-wake mode. If the URL fails, the device retains normal half-wake mode and a diagnostics message is issued.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 2000)

The URL of the web page.

Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection

Automatic wake up on motion detection is a feature that detects when people enter the room. The feature is based on ultrasound detection.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The wake up on motion detection is disabled.

On: When people walk into the room the device will automatically wake up from standby.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

141

Administrator Guide

Appendices www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

SystemUnit settings

SystemUnit Name

Define the device name. The device name will be sent as the hostname in a DHCP request and when the device is acting as an SNMP Agent.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 50)

Define the device name.

SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced

If the device crashes, the device can automatically send logs to the Cisco Automatic Crash

Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage only and not available to customers.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The ACR tool will perform standard log analyses.

On: The ACR tool will perform advanced log analyses.

SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode

If the device crashes, the device can automatically send logs to the Cisco Automatic Crash

Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage only and not available to customers.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: No logs will be sent to ACR tool.

On: The logs will automatically be sent to ACR tool.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

SystemUnit CrashReporting Url

If the device crashes, the device can automatically send logs to the Cisco Automatic Crash

Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage only and not available to customers.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: "acr.cisco.com"

Value space: String (0..255)

The URL to the Cisco Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

142

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Time settings

Time TimeFormat

Define the time format.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 24H

Value space: 24H/12H

24H: Set the time format to 24 hours.

12H: Set the time format to 12 hours (AM/PM).

Time DateFormat

Define the date format.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: DD_MM_YY

Value space: DD_MM_YY/MM_DD_YY/YY_MM_DD

DD_MM_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 30.01.10

MM_DD_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 01.30.10

YY_MM_DD: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 10.01.30

Peripherals Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

143 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Time Zone

Define the time zone for the geographical location of the device. The information in the value space is from the tz database, also called the IANA Time Zone Database.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Etc/UTC

Value space: Africa/Abidjan, Africa/Accra, Africa/Addis_Ababa, Africa/Algiers, Africa/

Asmara, Africa/Asmera, Africa/Bamako, Africa/Bangui, Africa/Banjul, Africa/Bissau, Africa/

Blantyre, Africa/Brazzaville, Africa/Bujumbura, Africa/Cairo, Africa/Casablanca, Africa/Ceuta,

Africa/Conakry, Africa/Dakar, Africa/Dar_es_Salaam, Africa/Djibouti, Africa/Douala, Africa/

El_Aaiun, Africa/Freetown, Africa/Gaborone, Africa/Harare, Africa/Johannesburg, Africa/

Juba, Africa/Kampala, Africa/Khartoum, Africa/Kigali, Africa/Kinshasa, Africa/Lagos, Africa/

Libreville, Africa/Lome, Africa/Luanda, Africa/Lubumbashi, Africa/Lusaka, Africa/Malabo,

Africa/Maputo, Africa/Maseru, Africa/Mbabane, Africa/Mogadishu, Africa/Monrovia, Africa/

Nairobi, Africa/Ndjamena, Africa/Niamey, Africa/Nouakchott, Africa/Ouagadougou, Africa/

Porto-Novo, Africa/Sao_Tome, Africa/Timbuktu, Africa/Tripoli, Africa/Tunis, Africa/

Windhoek, America/Adak, America/Anchorage, America/Anguilla, America/Antigua,

America/Araguaina, America/Argentina/Buenos_Aires, America/Argentina/Catamarca,

America/Argentina/ComodRivadavia, America/Argentina/Cordoba, America/Argentina/Jujuy,

America/Argentina/La_Rioja, America/Argentina/Mendoza, America/Argentina/Rio_

Gallegos, America/Argentina/Salta, America/Argentina/San_Juan, America/Argentina/

San_Luis, America/Argentina/Tucuman, America/Argentina/Ushuaia, America/Aruba,

America/Asuncion, America/Atikokan, America/Atka, America/Bahia, America/Bahia_

Banderas, America/Barbados, America/Belem, America/Belize, America/Blanc-Sablon,

America/Boa_Vista, America/Bogota, America/Boise, America/Buenos_Aires, America/

Cambridge_Bay, America/Campo_Grande, America/Cancun, America/Caracas, America/

Catamarca, America/Cayenne, America/Cayman, America/Chicago, America/Chihuahua,

America/Coral_Harbour, America/Cordoba, America/Costa_Rica, America/Creston,

America/Cuiaba, America/Curacao, America/Danmarkshavn, America/Dawson, America/

Dawson_Creek, America/Denver, America/Detroit, America/Dominica, America/Edmonton,

America/Eirunepe, America/El_Salvador, America/Ensenada, America/Fort_Nelson,

America/Fort_Wayne, America/Fortaleza, America/Glace_Bay, America/Godthab, America/

Goose_Bay, America/Grand_Turk, America/Grenada, America/Guadeloupe, America/

Guatemala, America/Guayaquil, America/Guyana, America/Halifax, America/Havana,

America/Hermosillo, America/Indiana/Indianapolis, America/Indiana/Knox, America/Indiana/

Marengo, America/Indiana/Petersburg, America/Indiana/Tell_City, America/Indiana/Vevay,

America/Indiana/Vincennes, America/Indiana/Winamac, America/Indianapolis, America/

Inuvik, America/Iqaluit, America/Jamaica, America/Jujuy, America/Juneau, America/

Kentucky/Louisville, America/Kentucky/Monticello, America/Knox_IN, America/Kralendijk,

America/La_Paz, America/Lima, America/Los_Angeles, America/Louisville, America/

Lower_Princes, America/Maceio, America/Managua, America/Manaus, America/Marigot,

America/Martinique, America/Matamoros, America/Mazatlan, America/Mendoza, America/

Menominee, America/Merida, America/Metlakatla, America/Mexico_City, America/

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

144

Miquelon, America/Moncton, America/Monterrey, America/Montevideo, America/Montreal,

America/Montserrat, America/Nassau, America/New_York, America/Nipigon, America/

Nome, America/Noronha, America/North_Dakota/Beulah, America/North_Dakota/Center,

America/North_Dakota/New_Salem, America/Ojinaga, America/Panama, America/

Pangnirtung, America/Paramaribo, America/Phoenix, America/Port-au-Prince, America/

Port_of_Spain, America/Porto_Acre, America/Porto_Velho, America/Puerto_Rico, America/

Rainy_River, America/Rankin_Inlet, America/Recife, America/Regina, America/Resolute,

America/Rio_Branco, America/Rosario, America/Santa_Isabel, America/Santarem,

America/Santiago, America/Santo_Domingo, America/Sao_Paulo, America/Scoresbysund,

America/Shiprock, America/Sitka, America/St_Barthelemy, America/St_Johns, America/

St_Kitts, America/St_Lucia, America/St_Thomas, America/St_Vincent, America/Swift_

Current, America/Tegucigalpa, America/Thule, America/Thunder_Bay, America/Tijuana,

America/Toronto, America/Tortola, America/Vancouver, America/Virgin, America/

Whitehorse, America/Winnipeg, America/Yakutat, America/Yellowknife, Antarctica/Casey,

Antarctica/Davis, Antarctica/DumontDUrville, Antarctica/Macquarie, Antarctica/Mawson,

Antarctica/McMurdo, Antarctica/Palmer, Antarctica/Rothera, Antarctica/South_Pole,

Antarctica/Syowa, Antarctica/Troll, Antarctica/Vostok, Arctic/Longyearbyen, Asia/Aden,

Asia/Almaty, Asia/Amman, Asia/Anadyr, Asia/Aqtau, Asia/Aqtobe, Asia/Ashgabat, Asia/

Ashkhabad, Asia/Baghdad, Asia/Bahrain, Asia/Baku, Asia/Bangkok, Asia/Barnaul, Asia/

Beirut, Asia/Bishkek, Asia/Brunei, Asia/Calcutta, Asia/Chita, Asia/Choibalsan, Asia/

Chongqing, Asia/Chungking, Asia/Colombo, Asia/Dacca, Asia/Damascus, Asia/Dhaka, Asia/

Dili, Asia/Dubai, Asia/Dushanbe, Asia/Gaza, Asia/Harbin, Asia/Hebron, Asia/Ho_Chi_Minh,

Asia/Hong_Kong, Asia/Hovd, Asia/Irkutsk, Asia/Istanbul, Asia/Jakarta, Asia/Jayapura, Asia/

Jerusalem, Asia/Kabul, Asia/Kamchatka, Asia/Karachi, Asia/Kashgar, Asia/Kathmandu, Asia/

Katmandu, Asia/Khandyga, Asia/Kolkata, Asia/Krasnoyarsk, Asia/Kuala_Lumpur, Asia/

Kuching, Asia/Kuwait, Asia/Macao, Asia/Macau, Asia/Magadan, Asia/Makassar, Asia/Manila,

Asia/Muscat, Asia/Nicosia, Asia/Novokuznetsk, Asia/Novosibirsk, Asia/Omsk, Asia/Oral,

Asia/Phnom_Penh, Asia/Pontianak, Asia/Pyongyang, Asia/Qatar, Asia/Qyzylorda, Asia/

Rangoon, Asia/Riyadh, Asia/Saigon, Asia/Sakhalin, Asia/Samarkand, Asia/Seoul, Asia/

Shanghai, Asia/Singapore, Asia/Srednekolymsk, Asia/Taipei, Asia/Tashkent, Asia/Tbilisi,

Asia/Tehran, Asia/Tel_Aviv, Asia/Thimbu, Asia/Thimphu, Asia/Tokyo, Asia/Tomsk, Asia/

Ujung_Pandang, Asia/Ulaanbaatar, Asia/Ulan_Bator, Asia/Urumqi, Asia/Ust-Nera, Asia/

Vientiane, Asia/Vladivostok, Asia/Yakutsk, Asia/Yekaterinburg, Asia/Yerevan, Atlantic/

Azores, Atlantic/Bermuda, Atlantic/Canary, Atlantic/Cape_Verde, Atlantic/Faeroe, Atlantic/

Faroe, Atlantic/Jan_Mayen, Atlantic/Madeira, Atlantic/Reykjavik, Atlantic/South_Georgia,

Atlantic/St_Helena, Atlantic/Stanley, Australia/ACT, Australia/Adelaide, Australia/Brisbane,

Australia/Broken_Hill, Australia/Canberra, Australia/Currie, Australia/Darwin, Australia/Eucla,

Australia/Hobart, Australia/LHI, Australia/Lindeman, Australia/Lord_Howe, Australia/

Melbourne, Australia/NSW, Australia/North, Australia/Perth, Australia/Queensland, Australia/

South, Australia/Sydney, Australia/Tasmania, Australia/Victoria, Australia/West, Australia/

Yancowinna, Brazil/Acre, Brazil/DeNoronha, Brazil/East, Brazil/West, CET, CST6CDT,

Canada/Atlantic, Canada/Central, Canada/East-Saskatchewan, Canada/Eastern, Canada/

Mountain, Canada/Newfoundland, Canada/Pacific, Canada/Saskatchewan, Canada/Yukon,

Chile/Continental, Chile/EasterIsland, Cuba, EET, EST, EST5EDT, Egypt, Eire, Etc/GMT, Etc/

GMT+0, Etc/GMT+1, Etc/GMT+10, Etc/GMT+11, Etc/GMT+12, Etc/GMT+2, Etc/GMT+3, Etc/ www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

GMT+4, Etc/GMT+5, Etc/GMT+6, Etc/GMT+7, Etc/GMT+8, Etc/GMT+9, Etc/GMT-0, Etc/GMT-1,

Etc/GMT-10, Etc/GMT-11, Etc/GMT-12, Etc/GMT-13, Etc/GMT-14, Etc/GMT-2, Etc/GMT-3,

Etc/GMT-4, Etc/GMT-5, Etc/GMT-6, Etc/GMT-7, Etc/GMT-8, Etc/GMT-9, Etc/GMT0, Etc/

Greenwich, Etc/UCT, Etc/UTC, Etc/Universal, Etc/Zulu, Europe/Amsterdam, Europe/Andorra,

Europe/Astrakhan, Europe/Athens, Europe/Belfast, Europe/Belgrade, Europe/Berlin, Europe/

Bratislava, Europe/Brussels, Europe/Bucharest, Europe/Budapest, Europe/Busingen,

Europe/Chisinau, Europe/Copenhagen, Europe/Dublin, Europe/Gibraltar, Europe/Guernsey,

Europe/Helsinki, Europe/Isle_of_Man, Europe/Istanbul, Europe/Jersey, Europe/Kaliningrad,

Europe/Kiev, Europe/Kirov, Europe/Lisbon, Europe/Ljubljana, Europe/London, Europe/

Luxembourg, Europe/Madrid, Europe/Malta, Europe/Mariehamn, Europe/Minsk, Europe/

Monaco, Europe/Moscow, Europe/Nicosia, Europe/Oslo, Europe/Paris, Europe/Podgorica,

Europe/Prague, Europe/Riga, Europe/Rome, Europe/Samara, Europe/San_Marino, Europe/

Sarajevo, Europe/Simferopol, Europe/Skopje, Europe/Sofia, Europe/Stockholm, Europe/

Tallinn, Europe/Tirane, Europe/Tiraspol, Europe/Ulyanovsk, Europe/Uzhgorod, Europe/

Vaduz, Europe/Vatican, Europe/Vienna, Europe/Vilnius, Europe/Volgograd, Europe/Warsaw,

Europe/Zagreb, Europe/Zaporozhye, Europe/Zurich, GB, GB-Eire, GMT, GMT+0, GMT-0,

GMT0, Greenwich, HST, Hongkong, Iceland, Indian/Antananarivo, Indian/Chagos, Indian/

Christmas, Indian/Cocos, Indian/Comoro, Indian/Kerguelen, Indian/Mahe, Indian/Maldives,

Indian/Mauritius, Indian/Mayotte, Indian/Reunion, Iran, Israel, Jamaica, Japan, Kwajalein,

Libya, MET, MST, MST7MDT, Mexico/BajaNorte, Mexico/BajaSur, Mexico/General, NZ,

NZ-CHAT, Navajo, PRC, PST8PDT, Pacific/Apia, Pacific/Auckland, Pacific/Bougainville,

Pacific/Chatham, Pacific/Chuuk, Pacific/Easter, Pacific/Efate, Pacific/Enderbury, Pacific/

Fakaofo, Pacific/Fiji, Pacific/Funafuti, Pacific/Galapagos, Pacific/Gambier, Pacific/

Guadalcanal, Pacific/Guam, Pacific/Honolulu, Pacific/Johnston, Pacific/Kiritimati, Pacific/

Kosrae, Pacific/Kwajalein, Pacific/Majuro, Pacific/Marquesas, Pacific/Midway, Pacific/Nauru,

Pacific/Niue, Pacific/Norfolk, Pacific/Noumea, Pacific/Pago_Pago, Pacific/Palau, Pacific/

Pitcairn, Pacific/Pohnpei, Pacific/Ponape, Pacific/Port_Moresby, Pacific/Rarotonga, Pacific/

Saipan, Pacific/Samoa, Pacific/Tahiti, Pacific/Tarawa, Pacific/Tongatapu, Pacific/Truk,

Pacific/Wake, Pacific/Wallis, Pacific/Yap, Poland, Portugal, ROC, ROK, Singapore, Turkey,

UCT, US/Alaska, US/Aleutian, US/Arizona, US/Central, US/East-Indiana, US/Eastern, US/

Hawaii, US/Indiana-Starke, US/Michigan, US/Mountain, US/Pacific, US/Pacific-New, US/

Samoa, UTC, Universal, W-SU, WET, Zulu

Select a time zone from the list.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

145 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

UserInterface settings

UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification

You can enable an incoming call notification with amplified visuals. The screen and Touch

10 will flash red/white approximately once every second (1.75 Hz) to make it easier for hearing impaired users to notice an incoming call. If the device is already in a call the screen will not flash as this will disturb the on-going call, instead you will get a normal notification on screen and touch panel.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Default

Value space: AmplifiedVisuals/Default

AmplifiedVisuals: Enable the amplified visuals on screen and touch panel when the device receives a call.

Default: Enable the default behavior with a notification on screen and touch panel.

UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors

If the device is set up with branding customizations, this setting affects the colors of the logo that is shown when the device is awake. You can choose whether you want to show the logo in full color, or reduce the opacity of the logo so that it blends in more naturally with the background and other elements on the screen.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Native

Auto: The opacity of the logo is reduced.

Native: The logo has full colors.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

UserInterface ContactInfo Type

Choose which type of contact information to show in the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/DisplayName/E164Alias/H320Number/H323Id/IPv4/IPv6/None/SipUri/

SystemName

Auto: Show the address which another device should dial to reach this video conferencing device. The address depends on the default call protocol and device registration.

None: Do not show any contact information.

IPv4: Show the device's IPv4 address.

IPv6: Show the device's IPv6 address.

H323Id: Show the device's H.323 ID (refer to the H323 H323Alias ID setting).

H320Number: Show the device's H.320 number as contact information (only supported if used with Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link).

E164Alias: Show the device's H.323 E164 Alias as contact information (refer to the H323

H323Alias E164 setting).

SipUri: Show the device's SIP URI (refer to the SIP URI setting).

SystemName: Show the device's name (refer to the SystemUnit Name setting).

DisplayName: Show the device's display name (refer to the SIP DisplayName setting).

UserInterface KeyTones Mode

You can configure the device to make a keyboard click sound effect (key tone) when typing text or numbers.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: There is no key tone sound effect.

On: The key tone sound effect is turned on.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

146

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

UserInterface Features Call End

Choose whether or not to remove the default End Call button from the user interface. The setting removes only the button, not its functionality as such.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Hidden

Auto: Shows the default button in the user interface.

Hidden: Removes the default button from the user interface.

UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls

Choose whether or not to remove the default Hold, Transfer, and Resume in-call buttons from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Hidden

Auto: Shows the default buttons in the user interface.

Hidden: Removes the default buttons from the user interface.

UserInterface Features Call Start

Choose whether or not to remove the default Call button (including the directory, favorites, and recent calls lists) and the default in-call Add participant button from the user interface.

The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Hidden

Auto: Shows the default buttons in the user interface.

Hidden: Removes the default buttons from the user interface.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

UserInterface Features Call VideoMute

Choose whether or not to show the default "Turn video off" button in the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Hidden

Auto: Shows the "Turn video off" button in the user interface if this feature is supported in the ongoing call.

Hidden: The "Turn video off" button is never shown in the user interface.

UserInterface Features HideAll

Choose whether or not to remove all default buttons from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: False

Value space: False/True

False: Shows all default buttons in the user interface.

True: Removes all default buttons from the user interface.

UserInterface Features Share Start

Choose whether or not to remove the default buttons and other UI elements for sharing and previewing content, both in call and out of call, from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons and UI elements, not their functionality as such. You can share content using Proximity or the Cisco Webex Teams app still.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Hidden

Auto: Shows the default buttons and UI elements in the user interface.

Hidden: Removes the default buttons and UI elements from the user interface.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

147

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start

Choose whether or not to remove the default Whiteboard button from the user interface.

The setting removes only the button, not its functionality as such. This setting only applies to Cisco Webex registered devices.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Hidden

Auto: Shows the default button in the user interface.

Hidden: Removes the default button from the user interface.

UserInterface Language

Select the language to be used in the user interface. If the language is not supported, the default language (English) will be used.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: English

Value space: Arabic/Catalan/ChineseSimplified/ChineseTraditional/Czech/Danish/Dutch/

English/EnglishUK/Finnish/French/FrenchCanadian/German/Hebrew/Hungarian/Italian/

Japanese/Korean/Norwegian/Polish/Portuguese/PortugueseBrazilian/Russian/Spanish/

SpanishLatin/Swedish/Turkish

Select a language from the list.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator

Define for how long the encryption indicator is shown on screen. The icon for encrypted calls is a locked padlock.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/AlwaysOn/AlwaysOff

Auto: If the call is encrypted, a "Call is encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.

Then, an encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.

If the call is not encrypted, a "Call is not encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.

No encryption indicator icon is shown.

AlwaysOn: The “Call is encrypted” notification is shown for 5 seconds. Then, an encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.

AlwaysOff: The encryption indicator is never displayed on screen.

UserInterface OSD Output

Define on which monitor the on-screen information and indicators (OSD) should be displayed.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 1

Value space: 1

1: The device sends the on-screen information and indicators to the device's integrated screen.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

148 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

UserInterface Phonebook Mode

This setting determines if a user is allowed to add or change a contact in the Directory and

Favorites list from the user interface of the device.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: ReadWrite

Value space: ReadOnly/ReadWrite

ReadOnly: You neither can add a contact to the Favorites list, edit a contact in the

Favorites list, nor edit any contact from the Directory or Favorites list before calling.

ReadWrite: You are able to add a contact to the Favorites list, edit a contact in the

Favorites list, and edit a contact from the Directory or Favorites list before calling.

UserInterface Security Mode

This setting allows you to prevent important device information from being exposed in the user interface (drop down menu and Settings panel), for example the contact information and IP addresses of the video conferencing device, touch controller, and UCM/VCS registrars. It is important to note that such information is not hidden when navigating further into the Settings panel.

If you want to fully prevent that people without administrator rights can see the contact information, IP addresses, MAC address, serial number, and software version, you must also set the UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode to Locked, and of course have a passphrase for all user accounts with administrator rights.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Normal

Value space: Normal/Strong

Normal: IP addresses and other device information are shown on the user interface.

Strong: Contact information and IP addresses are not displayed on the user interface

(drop down menu and Settings panel).

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode

The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch 10 or on-screen) can be protected by the device's admin password. If this password is blank, anyone can access the settings in the

Settings panel, and for example factory reset the device. If authentication is enabled, all settings that require authentication have a padlock icon. You will be prompted to enter the administrator's username and passphrase when you select the setting. Some settings do not require authentication, they do not have a padlock icon.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Unlocked

Value space: Locked/Unlocked

Locked: Authentication with administrator's username and passphrase is required.

Unlocked: No authentication is required.

UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility

Choose whether or not to show the device name (or contact information) and the associated drop down menu and Settings panel on the user interface.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Hidden

Auto: Shows the device name with drop down menu and Settings panel on the user interface.

Hidden: Doesn't show the device name with drop down menu and Settings panel on the user interface.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

149 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

UserInterface SoundEffects Mode

You can configure the device to make a sound effect, e.g. when someone connects a laptop or mobile through Proximity.

The keyboard click sound effect when typing text is not affected by this setting (refer to the

UserInterface Keytones Mode setting).

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: There are no sound effects.

On: The sound effects are switched on.

UserInterface Wallpaper

Select a background image (wallpaper) for the video screen when idle.

You may upload a custom wallpaper to the device using the web interface. The following file formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG. The maximum file size is 4 MByte. When you use a custom wallpaper, the clock and the list of upcoming meetings are removed from the main display

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Custom/None

Auto: Use the default wallpaper.

None: There is no background image on the screen.

Custom: Use the custom wallpaper as background image on the screen. If no custom wallpaper is uploaded to the device, the setting will revert to the default value.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

150 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

UserManagement settings

UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter

The LDAP filter is used to determine which users should be granted administrator privileges.

You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP

Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the

UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0, 1024)

Refer to the LDAP specification for the syntax of this string. Example:

"(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com)

(sAMAccountName=username))"

UserManagement LDAP Admin Group

Members of this AD (Active Directory) group will be given administrator access. This setting is a shorthand for saying (memberOf:1.2.840.113556.1.4.1941:=<group name>).

You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP

Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the

UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The distinguished name of the AD group. Example: "CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com"

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

UserManagement LDAP Attribute

The attribute used to map to the provided username. If not set, sAMAccountName is used.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The attribute name.

UserManagement LDAP BaseDN

The distinguishing name of the entry at which to start a search (base).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

The distinguishing name of the base. Example: "DC=company, DC=com"

UserManagement LDAP Encryption

Define how to secure the communication between the device and the LDAP server. You can override the port number by using the UserManagement LDAP Server Port setting.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: LDAPS

Value space: LDAPS/None/STARTTLS

LDAPS: Connect to the LDAP server on port 636 over TLS (Transport Layer Security).

None: Connect to the LDAP server on port 389 with no encryption.

STARTTLS: Connect to the LDAP server on port 389, then send a STARTTLS command to upgrade to an encrypted connection (TLS).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

151

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion

Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: TLSv1.2

Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2

TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.

TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.

TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.

UserManagement LDAP Mode

The device supports the use of an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server as a central place to store and validate usernames and passwords. Use this setting to configure whether or not to use LDAP authentication. Our implementation is tested for the

Microsoft Active Directory (AD) service.

If you switch on LDAP Mode, make sure to configure the other UserManagement LDAP settings to suit your setup. Here is a few examples.

Example 1:

- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On

- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"

- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"

- UserManagement LDAP Admin Group: "CN=admin group, OU=company groups,

DC=company, DC=com"

Example 2:

- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On

- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"

- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"

- UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter: "(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com)(sAMAccountName=username))"

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: LDAP authentication is not allowed.

On: LDAP authentication is allowed.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

UserManagement LDAP Server Address

Set the IP address or hostname of the LDAP server.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: ""

Value space: String (0..255)

A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or hostname.

UserManagement LDAP Server Port

Set the port to connect to the LDAP server on. If set to 0, use the default for the selected protocol (see the UserManagement LDAP Encryption setting).

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: 0

Value space: Integer (0..65535)

The LDAP server port number.

UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate

When the device connects to an LDAP server, the server will identify itself to the device by presenting its certificate. Use this setting to determine whether or not the device will verify the server certificate.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: On

Value space: Off/On

Off: The device will not verify the LDAP server's certificate.

On: The device must verify that the LDAP server's certificate is signed by a trusted

Certificate Authority (CA). The CA must be on the list of trusted CAs that are uploaded to the device in advance. Use the device's web interface to manage the list of trusted CAs

(see more details in the administrator guide).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

152

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Video settings

Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition

Define the position on screen of the active speaker picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only takes effect when using a video layout where the active speaker is a PiP, i.e. the Overlay layout, or possibly a Custom layout (refer to the Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local setting).

The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call, it will have no effect on the current call.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Current

Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/

LowerLeft/LowerRight

Current: The position of the active speaker PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.

UpperLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.

UpperCenter: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper center position.

UpperRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.

CenterLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center left position.

CentreRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center right position.

LowerLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.

LowerRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote

Select which video layout family to be used in the stream that is sent to the remote participants (far end). This setting applies only when using a device's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to host a multipoint video conference.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Equal/Prominent/Overlay/Single

Auto: The default layout family, as given by the local layout database, will be used as the remote layout.

Equal: The Equal layout family will be used as the remote layout. All videos have equal size, as long as there is space enough on the screen.

Prominent: The Prominent layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be a large picture, while the other participants will be small pictures. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.

Overlay: The Overlay layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen, while the other participants will be small pictures-in-picture (PiP). Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.

Single: The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen.

The other participants are not shown. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.

Video DefaultMainSource

Define which video input source to be used as the default main video source when you start a call.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 1

Value space: 1

The source that is used as the default main video source.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

153

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId

n: 1..2

The camera ID is a unique identifier of the camera that is connected to this video input.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector n: 1

Value space: Connector n: 1

The camera ID is fixed and cannot be changed.

Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode

n: 1..2

Define whether the camera that is connected to this video input connector can be controlled or not.

Note that camera control is not available for Connector 2 (HDMI).

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector 1: On Connector 2: Off

Value space: Connector 1: Off/On Connector 2: Off

Off: Disable camera control.

On: Enable camera control.

Video Input Connector [n] CEC Mode

n: 2..2

The video input (HDMI) supports Consumer Electronics Control (CEC). When this setting is enabled, information about the connected device (for example device type and device name) is available in the video conferencing device status (Video Input Connector[n]

ConnectedDevice CEC [n]), provided that the connected device also supports CEC.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: On

Value space: Connector n: Off/On

Off: CEC is disabled.

On: CEC is enabled.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType

n: 1..2

Select which type of input source is connected to the video input.

Note that Connector 1 is the device's integrated camera.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector 1: camera Connector 2: PC

Value space: Connector 1: camera Connector 2: PC/camera/document_camera/ mediaplayer/whiteboard/other

PC: Use this when a computer is connected to the video input.

camera: Use this when a camera is connected to the video input.

document_camera: Use this when a document camera is connected to the video input.

mediaplayer: Use this when a media player is connected to the video input.

whiteboard: Use this when a whiteboard camera is connected to the video input.

other: Use this when the other options do not match.

Video Input Connector [n] Name

n: 1..2

Define a name for the video input connector.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector 1: "Camera" Connector 2: "PC"

Value space: String (0, 50)

Name for the video input connector.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

154

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile

n: 1..2

This setting will not take effect if the corresponding Video Input Connector [n] Quality setting is set to Sharpness.

The optimal definition profile reflects the lighting conditions in the video conferencing room and the quality of the camera. The better lighting conditions and the better quality of the camera, the higher the profile. Generally, the Normal or Medium profiles are recommended.

However, when the lighting conditions are very good, the High profile can be set in order to increase the resolution for a given call rate. The resolution must be supported by both the calling and called devices.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Medium

Value space: Normal/Medium/High

Normal: Use this profile for a normally to poorly lit environment. Resolutions will be set rather conservative.

Medium: Requires good and stable lighting conditions and a good quality video input. For some call rates this leads to higher resolution.

High: Requires nearly optimal video conferencing lighting conditions and a good quality video input in order to achieve a good overall experience. Rather high resolutions will be used.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Video Input Connector [n] PreferredResolution

n: 2..2

Define the preferred screen resolution and refresh rate that the video conferencing device advertises to the input sources that are connected via HDMI (for example a laptop). The logic for selection of the resolution on the source side will choose this resolution and refresh rate automatically, unless it is overridden manually by the source device (for example the laptop's display configuration software).

Note that the formats 2560_1440_60 and 3840_2160_30 use about twice the amount of data compared to the 1920_1080_60 format, and requires a presentation cable (or adapter) that is qualified for at least HDMI 1.4b data rates.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector n: 1920_1080_60

Value space: Connector n: 1920_1080_60/2560_1440_60/3840_2160_30

1920_1080_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.

2560_1440_60: The resolution is 2560 x 1440, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.

3840_2160_30: The resolution is 3840 x 2160, and the refresh rate is 30 Hz.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

155 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection

n: 2..2

Define how the video conferencing device will behave when you connect a presentation source to the video input.

If the device is in standby mode, it will wake up when you connect a presentation source.

Sharing the presentation with the far end requires additional action (select Share on the user interface) except when this setting is set to AutoShare.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector n: AutoShare

Value space: Connector n: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect

AutoShare: While in a call, the content on the video input will automatically be presented to the far end as well as on the local screen when you connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). You do not have to select Share on the user interface. If a presentation source is already connected when you make or answer a call, you have to manually select Share on the user interface.

Desktop: The content on the video input will be presented on the screen when you connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). This applies both when idle and in a call. Also, the content on the video input will stay on the screen when you leave the call, provided that it was the active input at the time of leaving.

Manual: The content on the video input will not be presented on the screen until you select Share from the user interface.

OnConnect: The content on the video input will be presented on screen when you connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). Otherwise, the behavior is the same as in manual mode.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Video Input Connector [n] Quality

n: 2..2

When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off between high resolution and high frame rate. For some video sources it is more important to transmit high frame rate than high resolution and vice versa. This setting specifies whether to give priority to high frame rate or to high resolution.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector n: Sharpness

Value space: Connector n: Motion/Sharpness

Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher frame rates, typically when a large number of participants are present or when there is a lot of motion in the picture.

Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest quality of detailed images and graphics.

Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange

n: 2..2

The devices connected to the video input should follow the rules for RGB video quantization range defined in CEA-861. Unfortunately some devices do not follow the standard and this configuration may be used to override the settings to get a perfect image with any source.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Auto

Value space: Auto/Full/Limited

Auto: RGB quantization range is automatically selected based on video format according to CEA-861-E. CE video formats will use limited quantization range levels. IT video formats will use full quantization range levels.

Full: Full quantization range. The R, G, B quantization range includes all code values (0 -

255). This is defined in CEA-861-E.

Limited: Limited Quantization Range. R, G, B quantization range that excludes some code values at the extremes (16 - 235). This is defined in CEA-861-E.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

156

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Video Input Connector [n] Visibility

n: 1..2

Define the visibility of the video input connector in the menus on the user interface.

Note that Connector 1 is the device's integrated camera, which is not available as a presentation source.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Connector 1: Never Connector 2: IfSignal

Value space: Connector 1: Never Connector 2: Always/IfSignal/Never

Always: The menu selection for the video input connector will always be visible on the user interface.

IfSignal: Yhe menu selection for the video input connector will only be visible when something is connected to the video input.

Never: The input source is not expected to be used as a presentation source, and will not show up on the user interface.

Video Output Connector [n] Resolution

n: 1..1

The resolution and refresh rate for the integrated screen. This value is fixed and cannot be changed.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER

Default value: 3840_2160_60

Value space: 3840_2160_60

3840_2160_60: The resolution is 3840 x 2160, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition

Define the position on screen of the presentation picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only takes effect when the presentation is explicitly minimized to a PiP, for example using the user interface. The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call, it will have no effect on the current call.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Current

Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/

LowerLeft/LowerRight

Current: The position of the presentation PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.

UpperLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.

UpperCenter: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper center position.

UpperRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.

CenterLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the center left position.

CenterRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the center right position.

LowerLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.

LowerRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.

Video Presentation DefaultSource

Define which video input source to use as a default presentation source. This setting may be used by the API and third-party user interfaces. It is not relevant when using the user interfaces provided by Cisco.

Requires user role: ADMIN, USER

Default value: 2

Value space: 1/2

The video input source to use as default presentation source.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

157 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Video Presentation Priority

Determine how to distribute the bandwidth between the presentation channel and the main video channel.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Equal

Value space: Equal/High/Low

Equal: The available bandwidth is shared equally between the presentation channel and the main video channel.

High: The presentation channel is assigned a larger portion of the available bandwidth at the expense of the main video channel.

Low: The main video channel is assigned a larger portion of the available bandwidth at the expense of the presentation channel.

Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode

Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be shown in full screen or as a small picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call. The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched on (see the Video Selfview Default Mode setting).

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Current

Value space: Off/Current/On

Off: Self-view will be shown as a PiP.

Current: The size of the self-view picture will be kept unchanged when leaving a call, i.e. if it was a PiP during the call, it remains a PiP after the call; if it was fullscreen during the call, it remains fullscreen after the call.

On: The self-view picture will be shown in fullscreen.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

Video Selfview Default Mode

Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be displayed on screen after a call. The position and size of the self-view window is determined by the Video Selfview Default

PIPPosition and the Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode settings respectively.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Current

Value space: Off/Current/On

Off: Self-view is switched off when leaving a call.

Current: Self-view is left as is, i.e. if it was on during the call, it remains on after the call; if it was off during the call, it remains off after the call.

On: Self-view is switched on when leaving a call.

Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole

Define which screen/output to display the main video source (self-view) after a call. The value reflects the monitor roles set for the different outputs in the Video Output Connector

[n] MonitorRole setting.

The setting applies both when self-view is displayed in full screen, and when it is displayed as picture-in-picture (PiP).

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Current

Value space: Current/First/Second

Current: When leaving a call, the self-view picture will be retained on the same output as it was during the call.

First: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output Connector [n]

MonitorRole set to First.

Second: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output

Connector [n] MonitorRole set to Second.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

158

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Video Selfview Default PIPPosition

Define the position on screen of the small self-view picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call.

The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched on (see the Video Selfview

Default Mode setting) and fullscreen view is switched off (see the Video Selfview Default

FullscreenMode setting).

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: LowerRight

Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/

LowerLeft/LowerRight

Current: The position of the self-view PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.

UpperLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.

UpperCenter: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper center position.

UpperRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.

CenterLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the center left position.

CentreRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the center right position.

LowerLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.

LowerRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.

Video Selfview OnCall Mode

This setting is used to switch on self-view for a short while when setting up a call. The

Video Selfview OnCall Duration setting determines for how long it remains on. This applies when self-view in general is switched off.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Self-view is not shown automatically during call setup.

On: Self-view is shown automatically during call setup.

Administrator Guide

Appendices Maintenance

Video Selfview OnCall Duration

This setting only has an effect when the Video Selfview OnCall Mode setting is switched

On. In this case, the number of seconds set here determines for how long self-view is shown before it is automatically switched off.

Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR

Default value: 10

Value space: Integer (1..60)

Range: Choose for how long self-view remains on. The valid range is between 1 and 60 seconds.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

159

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

WebEngine settings

WebEngine Mode

The web engine is a prerequisite for features that use the device's web view, for example digital signage and web apps.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: The web engine is disabled.

On: The web engine is enabled.

WebEngine RemoteDebugging

If you encounter a problem with a web page, it can be a good idea to turn on remote debugging. Remote debugging lets you access the Chrome developer console and identify potential issues with a web page. When enabled, a banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen, warning the users that they may be monitored. The banner also shows the URL that you can enter in your local Chrome browser to open the developer console.

Make sure to turn off remote debugging after use.

Requires user role: ADMIN

Default value: Off

Value space: Off/On

Off: Remote debugging is switched off.

On: Remote debugging is switched on.

Maintenance

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Appendices

160 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Experimental settings

The Experimental settings are for testing only and should not be used unless agreed with

Cisco. These settings are not documented and WILL change in later releases.

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

161 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Appendices

162 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

How to use the Webex Board

The Webex Board's user interface and how to use the board is described in full detail in the User guide .

You can control volume in a call or video presentation.

Tap the lower part of the screen and use the slider to adjust the volume.

If you have a Touch controller connected to the board, additional settings are available on the Touch controller.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Tap the device name or address to access Settings . Here you can find:

Device Information, Advanced Settings,

Network settings, Device activation,

Ringtone, Restart and Factory reset .

Tap Share to view sharing options.

Tap Call to make a call.

Tap Whiteboard to start a new whiteboard or to access the list of existing whiteboards.

Tap the Home button to return to the homescreen. Press and hold the button to put the board to stand by mode.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

163 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

How to use Touch 10

The Touch 10 user interface and its use are described in full detail in the User guide for the video conferencing device.

Peripherals

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Tap the device name or address to access System Information,

Settings, Restart and Factory reset . You can also activate Call forwarding, Standby, and Do not disturb modes.

Tap Call to make a call, and to invoke the

Favorites , Directory and

Recents contact lists.

Tap Messages to invoke the voice mail system, if available.

Press and hold the left side of the Volume button to decrease the loudspeaker volume and the right side to increase the volume.

164

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Tap ?

to contact Help desk or access other facility services, if available.

Tap the Camera icon to activate self-view and camera control.

Time of day.

Tap Share to start sharing content and to conduct presentations.

Entry point for user interface extensions (your device may have zero or more such buttons with different color, text and icons).

Press the Microphone button to mute and unmute microphones.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Set up remote monitoring

Requirement:

• RemoteMonitoring option

Remote monitoring is useful when you want to control the device from another location.

Snapshots from input sources appear in the web interface, so you can check the camera view and control the camera without being in the room.

If enabled, snapshots are refreshed automatically approximately every 5 seconds.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Check whether or not the device has the

RemoteMonitoring option

1. Sign in to the web interface.

2. Check the Home page to see if RemoteMonitoring is on the list of Installed options.

If not on the list, remote monitoring is not available.

Enable remote monitoring

Install the RemoteMonitoring option key. How to install option keys are described in the

► Add option keys

chapter.

PLEASE BE AWARE THAT IF YOU ENABLE THE REMOTE MONITORING

OPTION YOU MUST MAKE SURE THAT YOU COMPLY WITH LOCAL

LAWS AND REGULATIONS WITH REGARD TO PRIVACY AND PROVIDE

ADEQUATE NOTICE TO USERS OF THE DEVICE THAT THE SYSTEM

ADMINISTRATOR MAY MONITOR AND CONTROL THE CAMERA AND

SCREEN. IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO COMPLY WITH PRIVACY

REGULATIONS WHEN USING THE DEVICE AND CISCO DISCLAIMS ALL

LIABILITY FOR ANY UNLAWFUL USE OF THIS FEATURE.

Administrator Guide

About snapshots

Local input sources

Snapshots of the local input sources of the device appear on the Call Control page.

Snapshots appear both when the device is idle, and when in a call.

Far end snapshots

When in call, you may also see snapshots from the far end camera. It does not matter whether or not the far end device has the RemoteMonitoring option.

Far end snapshots are not displayed if the call is encrypted.

Automatically refresh snapshots

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

165

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Access call information and answer a call while using the web interface

Notification of an incoming call

Click the Call indicator to open the Call

Control page, where you can accept or decline the call.

The device is in a call

The badge indicates the number of active calls.

Call indicator

The call indicator is present to notify you about an incoming call, and to show when the device is in a call.

If the device is idle, there is no call indicator.

Control the call

Relevant control buttons are present on the

Call Control page. Use the buttons to:

Show call details

Put the call on hold

Answer the call

Disconnect the call

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

166 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Place a call using the web interface

(page 1 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control .

Place a call

Even if the web interface is used to initiate the call, it is the video conferencing device (display, microphones and loudspeakers) that is used for the call; it is not the PC running the web interface.

1. Navigate the Favorites, Directory or Recents lists to find the correct entry; or enter one or more characters in the Search or Dial field * . Click the correct contact name.

2. Click Call in the contact card.

Alternatively, enter the complete URI or number in the Search and

Dial field. Then click the Call button that appears next to the URI or number.

Maintenance Device settings

Send DTMF tones

Click to open a key pad that you can use if your application requires DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) signaling.

Show/hide call details

Click the information button to show details about the call.

Click the button again to hide the information.

* When searching, matching entries from the Favorites, Directory and Recents lists will be listed as you type.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

Hold and resume a call

Use the button next to a participant’s name to put that participant on hold.

To resume the call, use the button that is present when a participant is on hold.

End a call

If you want to terminate a call or conference, click

Disconnect all .

Confirm your choice in the dialog that appears.

To disconnect just one participant in a conference, click the button for that participant.

167 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals

Place a call using the web interface

(page 2 of 2)

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control .

Calling more than one

A point-to-point video call (a call involving two parties only) can be expanded to include one more participant on audio-only.

If your device is using the optional built-in MultiSite feature, up to four participants, yourself included, can join the video call

(conference).

Follow the same procedure to call the next conference participant as you did when calling the first participant.

Calling more than one using a conference bridge (CUCM ad hoc conferencing) is not supported from the web interface, even if it is supported by the video conferencing device itself.

Adjust the volume

Mute the microphone

Click Microphone: On to mute the microphone.

Then the text changes to Microphone: Off .

Click Microphone: Off to unmute.

Volume down

Volume up

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

168 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Share content using the web interface

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control .

Share content

1. Click Start Presentation . Then the text changes to Stop Presentation .

Stop content sharing:

Click the Stop Presentation button that is present while sharing.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Snapshot area

Shows snapshots of the selected presentation source.

Only available on devices that have the Remote

Monitoring option.

About content sharing

You can connect a presentation source to the video input of your device. Most often a PC is used as presentation source, but other options may be available depending on your device setup.

While in a call you can share content with the other participant(s) in the call (far end).

If you are not in a call, the content is shown locally.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

169 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Control a far end camera

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control .

Prerequisites

While in a call, you can control the remote participant’s camera

(far end) provided that:

• The Conference > FarEndControl > Mode setting is switched

On on the far end device.

• The far end camera has pan, tilt or zoom functionality. Only the relevant controls will appear.

• Speaker tracking is not switched On on the far end camera.

• The local device has the Remote Monitoring option.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Control the remote participant’s camera

1. Click the camera icon to open the remote camera control window.

2. Use the left and right arrows to pan the camera; the up and down arrows to tilt it; and

+ and to zoom in and out.

If you are not allowed to control the far end camera, the controls will not appear in the image.

If the call is encrypted, the far end snapshot behind the controls are not displayed.

170 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Packet loss resilience - ClearPath

ClearPath introduces several mechanisms for advanced packet loss resilience. These mechanisms increase the experienced quality when you use your device in an error prone environment.

ClearPath is a Cisco proprietary protocol. All endpoints running

CE software support ClearPath.

If the involved endpoints and infrastructure elements support

ClearPath, all packet loss resilience mechanisms are used in point-to-point connections (including hosted conferences). Only some of the mechanisms are supported in MultiSite conferences.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

171 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Room analytics

(page 1 of 2)

The room analytics feature use several variables from the conference room and re-uses them to analyze the room utilization over time or per call.

Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

People presence detection

The device has the capability to find whether or not people are present in the room. It takes a minimum of two minutes to detect whether people are present or not in the room. After the room becomes vacant, it may take up to two minutes for the status to change.

This feature is based on ultrasound. It will not keep record of who was in the room, only whether or not there are people present in the room.

You can turn the people presence detection on or off from the web interface. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration > RoomAnalytics >

PeoplePresenceDetector .

People count

By using face detection, the device can find how many persons are in the room. It will not keep record of who was in the room, only the average number of faces that were detected. Persons that have not faced the camera will not be counted. If there are objects or pictures in the room that can be detected as faces these might be counted.

The call must have a duration of minimum two minutes in order to get a reliable average. Calls that last less than two minutes, and calls which are made with people count disabled, will display

“N/A” when you retrive call history.

By default, the device only counts people when in a call, or when it displays the self-view picture.

You can choose to count people outside of call. When enabled, the device counts people as long as the device is not in standby mode. This includes outside of call, even if self-view is off. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration >

RoomAnalytics > PeopleCountOutOfCall .

Device settings

Administrator Guide

Status

You may see the status at a given moment of people’s presence and people count. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to

Setup > Status > RoomAnalytics .

Diagnostics

You can see the live people counter on-screen by enabling the

SpeakerTrack Diagnostics mode from the Touch 10 controller.

Turn on selfview, and tap the device name or address at the top of the user interface and open the Settings menu. Tap Issues & diagnostics and switch on SpeakerTrack diagnostics .

Alternatively, you can open the Technical support screen on the board (hold down one finger on the board's screen, and press the home button three times). Then click Hardware diagnostics under the Device tab, and turn on BestOverview debug .

Call history command

After a call the average people count value can be extracted from the Call History command.

xCommand CallHistory Get DetailLevel: Full

The Call History command is available from the API (Application

Programming Interface). Refer to the API Reference Guide for your product to for details.

Go to: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/board-docs

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

172

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Room analytics

(page 2 of 2)

Ambient noise reporting

The devices can report the stationary ambient noise level in the room. The reported value is an A-weighted decibel value (dBA), which reflects the response of the human ear. All signal processing related to this feature is local, the only data transmitted is the calculated noise level.

This value can be used to detect abnormal changes to the noise level. Such changes may be caused by noise that can be an annoyance for people working in the room. Facility management can then quickly intervene to troubleshoot the issue.

You can turn the ambient noise detection on or off from the web interface. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration > RoomAnalytics > AmbientNoiseEstimation >

Mode .

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

173 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Customization

Customize the video conferencing device's user interface

(page 1 of 2)

You can customize the user interface to allow control of peripherals in a meeting room, for example lights and blinds, or to modify the video conferencing device’s behavior by triggering macros.

This allows for the powerful combination of a control system’s functionality and the video conferencing device's user-friendly user interface (Touch 10).

In-room control architecture

You need a Cisco video conferencing device with a touch interface * , and a control system. The control system may be a third-party system, such as Crestron or AMX, with hardware drivers for peripherals. It is the control system, not the video conferencing device, that controls the peripherals.

When you program the control system you must use the video conferencing device’s API (events and commands) in order to connect with the controls on the video conferencing device's user interface.

Administrator Guide

Blinds

Touch 10

Video conferencing device

API

Control system

Climate

Example in-room control panel

If you have connected a Touch controller to the board, the custom panels and action buttons are on the Touch controller; not on the board itself. Web apps are always on the board.

Consult the Customization guide for full details about how to design custom user interface panels, action buttons, and web apps using the UI Extensions editor (formerly In-Room Control editor), and how to use the video conferencing device’s API to program the controls and actions. Go to:

► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs

UI extensions editor

Other...

In-room control schematics

Lights

The video conferencing device’s macro framework may also serve as a control system. In this case the control system can use the device’s API to trigger all sorts of local functionality: Speed dial, language selection, customized system reset, and much more.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

174 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Customization

Customize the video conferencing device's user interface

(page 2 of 2)

The UI Extensions editor

Free of charge editor

An easy to use drag-and-drop editor, which you should use to compose the custom user interface extensions (action buttons, web apps, and custom panels such as in-room controls), comes free of charge with the video conferencing device’s software.

Preview function

The editor also provides a preview function, which allows you to see how the custom interfaces will appear on the user interface.

The preview function is also a complete software version of your custom panels, so clicking the controls will result in the same actions as selecting them on the real user interface.

Therefore, you can use the preview function to test your integrations without having a real user interface available. You can also use the device’s custom panels from a remote location.

Sign in * to the web interface and navigate to Integration > UI

Extensions Editor .

• The editor opens directly in the device’s web interface.

You can create and push a new panel, action button, or web app to the device, and see the result immediately on its user interface.

• Click the Editor menu and select Download the Editor to get a stand-alone version that you can run locally in your browser from your hard drive.

Then you can compose your custom interfaces and web apps without being connected to a device. You can export and import to file to move your work between your local version and the device later.

Administrator Guide

* You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL, INTEGRATOR, or ADMIN user roles in order to access the UI Extensions editor and the API commands that you need when programming.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

175 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards Administrator Guide

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Customization

Customize the video conferencing device's behavior using macros

With macros, you can create your own snippets of code that run on the device. The language is JavaScript / ECMAScript 6 with support for features such as arrow functions, promises and classes.

The macro framework allows an integrator to write scripts that tailor a device's behavior to suite an individual customer's requirements. The integrators can, for example, implement their own features or variations of features, automate specific configurations or re-configurations, and create custom tests and monitoring functions.

Allow using macros on the device

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration .

• Set Macros > Mode to On .

If you try to launch the Macro editor while this setting is Off , a pop-up message appears. If you respond by tapping Enable

Macros, the Macros > Mode setting will automatically change to On , and the editor will launch.

By combining the use of macros and creation of a custom user interface panel (UI extension), you can amend the user interface to trigger customized local functionality. For examples:

• Add speed dial buttons

• Add a button for room reset, which set all configurations back to your preferred default setup

Launch the macro editor

Sign in * to the web interface and navigate to Integration > Macro

Editor .

We don't offer a stand-alone version of the editor that you can use to work offline.

The Macro editor

The Macro editor is a powerful tool where you can:

• Load our code examples, which you can modify, use as is, or use as inspiration when writing your own macros.

• Read our detailed macro scripting tutorial, which also explains the code examples in more detailed.

• Write your own macros, and upload them to the device.

• Enable/Disable individual macros.

• Check in an embedded Log Console what happens when you run a macro.

Consult the Customization guide for details about macros and how to use the device's built in Macro editor. Go to:

► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

* You need a user that holds the ADMIN user role in order to access the Macro editor.

176 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards Administrator Guide

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Customization

Remove default buttons from the user interface

In some use cases, you may never use a default button, like

Call or Share. Such unused buttons may cause confusion. In these cases, you can remove the unused buttons from the user interface. Custom UI buttons can be exposed still. Removing default buttons while adding custom buttons makes it possible fully to customize the user interface.

For example, you can remove the Call and Share buttons if nobody is going to share content or call from this device. Instead, add custom buttons and panels for the tasks that are going to be performed.

Configurations

Use the following configurations to remove default buttons from the user interface (applies both to the board itself and the Touch controller). The configurations are available both from the web interface of the device, and in the API.

• UserInterface > Features > Call > Start : Removes the default

Call button. Also removes the Add participant button from the

Touch controller while in a call.

• UserInterface > Features > Share > Start : Removes the default user interface for sharing and previewing content, both in call and out of call.

• UserInterface > Features > Whiteboard > Start : Removes the default button for starting a whiteboard.

• UserInterface > Features > Call > VideoMute : Removes the default Turn video off button.

• UserInterface > Features > HideAll : Removes all the default buttons. Custom buttons are not removed.

• UserInterface > Features > Call > End : Removes the End Call button.

• UserInterface > Features > Call > MidCallControls : Removes the Hold , Resume , and Transfer in-call buttons from the Touch controller.

Further Information

Find more details about how to remove buttons and customize the user interface in the Customization guide . Go to:

► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-roomcontrol-docs

The configurations remove only the buttons, not the functionality as such. You can share content using

Proximity, even if you have removed the Share button from the user interface.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

177 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Customization

Sending HTTP(S) requests

API xCommand HttpClient Post/Put/Patch/Get/Delete

Video conferencing device - HTTP(S) client

The HTTP(S) request feature makes it possible to send arbitrary HTTP(S) requests from a video conferencing device to an HTTP(S) server. Furthermore, the device receives the response that the server sends back. The device supports the Post , Put , Patch , Get , and Delete methods.

By using macros, you can send data to an HTTP(S) server whenever you want. You can choose what data to send, and structure them as you like. By doing it this way, you can adapt the data to an already established service.

Security measures:

• The HTTP(S) request feature is disabled by default. A system administrator must explicitly enable the feature by setting HttpClient > Mode to On .

• The system administrator can prevent the use of HTTP by setting HttpClient > AllowHTTP to False .

• The system administrator can specify a list of HTTP(S) servers that the device is allowed to send data to.

• The number of concurrent HTTP(S) requests is limited.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Network

Third-party service

HTTP(S) server

List of Allowed HTTP(S) servers

The system administrator can use these commands to set up and maintain a list of up to ten allowed HTTP(S) servers

(hosts):

xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Add

Expression: <Regular expression that matches the host name or IP address of the HTTP(S) server> xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Clear xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname List xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Remove Id:

<id of an entry in the list>

If the list is not empty, you can send HTTP(S) requests only to the servers in the list. If the list is empty, you can send the requests to any HTTP(S) server.

The check against the list of allowed servers is performed both when using insecure (HTTP) and secure (HTTPS) transfer of data.

178

HTTPS without certificate validation

When sending requests over HTTPS, the video conferencing device checks the certificate of the HTTPS server by default. If the HTTPS server certificate is not found to be valid, you get an error message. The device doesn’t send any data to that server.

We recommend using HTTPS with certificate validation.

If certificate validation is not possible, the system administrator can set HttpClient > AllowInsecureHTTPS to

On . This allows the use of HTTPS without validating the certificate of the server.

Sending HTTP(S) requests

Once the HTTP(S) request feature is enabled, you can use the following commands to send requests to an

HTTP(S) server:

xCommand HttpClient <Method

>

[AllowInsecureHTTPS: <True/False>]

[Header: <Header text>]

[ResponseSizeLimit: <Maximum response size>]

[ResultBody: <None/PlainText/Base64>]

[Timeout: <Timeout period>]

Url: <URL to send the request to>

where <

Method>

is either

Post

,

Put

,

Patch

,

Get

, or

Delete

.

The

Post

,

Put

, and

Patch

commands are multiline commands. Read the API guide to find out how to use multiline commands, and also to find a detailed description of the command parameters

Further information

Find more information about HTTP(S) Post requests in the

Customization guide . Go to:

► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Web view based features

Digital signage

Digital signage allows you to show custom content (a web page) on a device when it's in half-wake state. Digital signage is a way to display advertising content and promote your brand, but also to show visitor and internal employee information, dashboards, or calendars.

Users can interact with the content on the screen, for example click on a link or enter text in a form.

The content replaces the traditional half-wake background image and information, and is always shown on full screen. Only one web window or tab is supported. If a web page tries to open a page in a new window or tab, it replaces the current page.

Data, such as cache, cookies, and local storage, is NOT automatically cleared when the device restarts. You must use the delete storage command to delete the data.

xCommand WebEngine DeleteStorage [Type: WebApps]

If a web page is not supported, the device goes directly to normal half-wake mode. You can see more information in the

Maintenance > Diagnostics page in the web interface of the device.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Set up digital signage

1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration .

2. Set WebEngine > Mode to On to enable the web engine.

3. Set Standby > Signage > Mode to On to enable digital signage.

4. Enter the URL of the web page that you want to show in

Standby > Signage > Url .

5. The web page is shown before the device enters standby mode. Use the following settings to determine for how long the web page is shown.

Standby > Mode : If set to Off , the device never enters standby mode (not recommended). If set to On , the device enters standby mode when the Standby > Delay has timed out.

Standby > Delay : Define how long (in minutes) the device shows the web page before going into standby mode.

Standby > WakeUpOnMotionDetection : If set to On , the device wakes up automatically from standby, and starts showing the web page when people enter the room. If set to Off , the device is not affected by people entering the room.

Other digital signage settings:

• Decide whether to play out the audio for web pages that have audio.

Standby > Signage > Audio

• Decide whether to allow interaction with the web page.

Standby > Signage > InteractiveMode

• Force a web page to refresh at regular intervals. This is useful for web pages that don't refresh themselves.

Standby > Signage > RefreshInterval

The web engine

All web view based features are using the web engine. Therefore the web engine must be enabled before you can use a web view based feature.

The web engine is based on Chromium /

Qt WebEngine with V8 JavaScript. The

Chromium version is updated regularly, but it might be older than your Chrome laptop version.

These features are not supported: PDF,

WebGL WebRTC, password manager, plug-ins, downloading and uploading files, and notifications.

Remote debugging

If you encounter a problem with a web page, you can turn on remote debugging.

WebEngine > RemoteDebugging

Remote debugging lets you access the

Chrome developer console and identify potential issues with a web page. When enabled, a banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen, warning the users that they may be monitored. The banner also shows the URL that you can enter in your local Chrome browser to open the developer console.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

179

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Web view based features

Web apps

A web app is a web page or application that a user can access from the home screen of the device. The web app is available only when not in a call.

A web app launches in full screen, and times out after 15 minutes if not being used. The web app may be interactive.

Data, such as cache, cookies, and local storage, is automatically cleared when the session ends.

You must use the UI Extensions editor , which is available from the web interface of the device, to create web apps. The editor also lets you configure the label and icon to be used on the Home screen. By default, the web page's icon is used, but you can choose another icon instead.

Icon details:

• Formats: .ico, .png, .jpg. svg, or .gif

• Icon size: Minimum 60×60 pixels, maximum 1200×1200 pixels

Typical apps may be Office 365, Trello, Wikipedia, YouTube or company internal web pages and tools.

Further information

Find more information about how to create web apps in the

Customization guide . Go to:

► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs

Peripherals Maintenance

Create a web app

1. Sign in * to the web interface and navigate to Setup >

Configuration .

2. Set WebEngine > Mode to On to enable the web engine.

3. Navigate to Integration > UI Extensions Editor , and the editor opens directly in the device's web interface.

4. Select the Webapp Add button.

5. Fill in the web app properties in the right side bar:

• Id: Unique identifier of the app.

• Name: The label of the button on the Home screen.

• URL: The web app URL.

• Icon URL (optional): The icon on the Home screen button.

6. Click the export button in the top bar to upload the configuration to the device.

Now you can see the button for the new web app on the

Home screen.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

The web engine

All web view based features are using the web engine. Therefore the web engine must be enabled before you can use a web view based feature.

The web engine is based on Chromium /

Qt WebEngine with V8 JavaScript. The

Chromium version is updated regularly, but it might be older than your Chrome laptop version.

These features are not supported: PDF,

WebGL WebRTC, password manager, plug-ins, downloading and uploading files, and notifications.

Remote debugging

If you encounter a problem with a web page, you can turn on remote debugging.

WebEngine > RemoteDebugging

Remote debugging lets you access the

Chrome developer console and identify potential issues with a web page. When enabled, a banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen, warning the users that they may be monitored. The banner also shows the URL that you can enter in your local Chrome browser to open the developer console.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Web app button with label and icon

* You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL, INTEGRATOR, or ADMIN user roles in order to access the UI Extensions editor and the API commands that you need when programming.

180 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Web view based features

API-driven web views

Web views can be opened and closed using API commands.

Integrators can use these commands when making third-party integrations or macros. The integrator decides which URL to load based on external events. An example is to show important company alerts.

The web view is fullscreen and will time out after 15 minutes, or by calling the API command to close the view.

Open the web view:

xCommand UserInterface WebView Display Url: <url>

Close the web view:

xCommand UserInterface WebView Clear

Data, such as cache, cookies, and local storage, is automatically cleared when the session ends.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

By combining API-driven web views, macros, and custom buttons on the Touch controller, an integrator can make interactive solutions also for devices without touch screens. Tapping different buttons on the Touch controller shows different web views on the main screen. For example to open and browse basic help pages or show instructional videos.

The web engine

All web view based features are using the web engine. Therefore the web engine must be enabled before you can use a web view based feature.

The web engine is based on Chromium /

Qt WebEngine with V8 JavaScript. The

Chromium version is updated regularly, but it might be older than your Chrome laptop version.

These features are not supported: PDF,

WebGL WebRTC, password manager, plug-ins, downloading and uploading files, and notifications.

Remote debugging

If you encounter a problem with a web page, you can turn on remote debugging.

WebEngine > RemoteDebugging

Remote debugging lets you access the

Chrome developer console and identify potential issues with a web page. When enabled, a banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen, warning the users that they may be monitored. The banner also shows the URL that you can enter in your local Chrome browser to open the developer console.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

181

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Presentation source composition

(page 1 of 2)

You can use the device’s API to combine up to four presentation sources in a single video stream.

The maxmium number of different presentation sources depends on the device:

Video conferencing device

Maximum number of different presentation sources

2 Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, SX20,

MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Board

Codec Plus, Room 55,

Room 55 Dual, Room 70

SX80, MX700, MX800,

Codec Pro, Room 70 G2

SX10, DX70, DX80

3

4

Not applicable

You can only share sources that has been shared through a cable

(DVI, VGA, HDMI - depending on the device).

Source composition

Composition layout

You can choose between two layouts:

• Equal

• Prominent

You can change the number of sources at any time, both in call and outside of call. The image sizes cannot be modified.

The order in which the sources appear on the screen depends on the order they have in the command; starting from upper left, ending at bottom right.

Change compositions and layouts on demand

Presentation source composition is only available using API commands; we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.

To be able to easily change compositions and layouts on demand, we recommend that you use macros and create a custom user interface panel (UI extension) for it.

Layouts

Equal

Administrator Guide

Number of sources: 2

Prominent

Number of sources: 2

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

182 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Presentation source composition

(page 2 of 2)

API command xCommand Presentation Start

ConnectorId: <1..n>

PresentationSource: <1..n>

Instance: <New, 1..n>

Layout: <Equal, Prominent>

SendingMode: <LocalRemote, LocalOnly> where

The input source can be identified by either the physical connector that it is connected to (

ConnectorId

identifier (

), or by the logical source

PresentationSource

). There cannot be a mix of different types of identifiers in the same command; use either

ConnectorId

or

PresentationSource

. You can find these identifiers in the Video Input

Connector and Video Input Source statuses.

Refer to the API-guide for more details.

Examples xCommand Presentation Start PresentationSource: 1 PresentationSource: 2 Layout: Equal xCommand Presentation Start ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 Layout: Prominent

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

183 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Manage startup scripts

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration > Startup

Scripts .

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

List of startup scripts

You can create one or more startup scripts * .

A green dot appears next to an active startup script; a red ring appears next to an inactive startup script.

If you have more than one startup script, they will run in the order from top to bottom of the list.

Creat a startup script

1. Click Create new...

.

The script names and configurations shown in the illustration serve as examples. You may make your own scripts.

Run a startup script immediately

1. Select the startup script from the list.

2. Click Run.

Both active and inactive startup scripts can be run immediately.

2. Enter a name for the startup script in the title input field.

3. Enter the commands (xConfiguration or xCommand) in the command input area. Start each command on a new line.

4. Click Save .

Activate or deactivate a startup script

1. Select the startup script from the list.

2. Click On to activate, or Off to deactivate a script.

Active startup scripts will run every time the device starts up.

5. Click On to activate the startup script.

If you want to use an existing script as a starting point for editing, select that script and click Copy .

Delete a startup script

1. Select the startup script from the list.

2. Click Delete .

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

184

About startup scripts

A startup script contains commands

(xCommand) and configurations

(xConfiguration) that will be executed as part of the start up procedure.

A few commands and configurations cannot be placed in a startup script, for example

xCommand SystemUnit

Boot

. It is not possible to save a script that contains illegal commands and configurations.

Syntax and semantics for xCommand and xConfiguration are explained in the API guide for the product.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Access the device’s XML files

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration >

Developer API .

The XML files are part of the device’s API. They structure information about the device in a hierarchy.

• Configuration.xml

contains the current device settings

(configuration). These settings are controlled from the web interface or from the API (Application Programmer Interface).

• The information in status.xml

is constantly updated by the device to reflect system and process changes. The status information is monitored from the web interface or from the

API.

• Command.xml

contains an overview of the commands available to instruct the device to perform an action. The commands are issued from the API.

• Valuespace.xml

contains an overview of all the value spaces of device settings, status information, and commands.

Peripherals Maintenance

Open an XML file

Click the file name to open the XML file.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

About the API

The application programming interface

(API) is a tool for integration professionals and developers working with the device.

The API is described in detail in the API guide for the device.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

185 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance

Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface

Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration >

Developer API .

Commands (xCommand) and configurations (xConfiguration) can be executed from the web interface. Syntax and semantics are explained in the API guide for the device.

Device settings

Administrator Guide

About the API

The application programming interface

(API) is a tool for integration professionals and developers working with the device.

The API is described in detail in the API guide for the device.

Execute API commands and configurations

1. Enter a command (xCommand or xConfiguration), or a sequence of commands, in the text area.

2. Click Execute to issue the command(s).

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

186 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Audio line out

HDMI input

Network

Power

Audio line out

HDMI input

Network

Power

HDMI input

USB

Network

Power

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction

Connector panel

Configuration

Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S 1

Webex Board 55

Webex Board 70

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals

Maintenance

USB-C

Status LED

Factory reset

USB

Status LED

Factory reset

Audio line out

Status LED

Factory reset

187

Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Power

• Board 55S: 100-240 VAC, 3.0-1.5 A, 50/60 Hz

• Board 70S: 100-240 VAC, 3.5-2.0 A, 50/60 Hz

• Board 85S: 100-240 VAC, 4.6-2.0 A, 50/60 Hz

• Board 55, 70: 100-240 VAC, 3.5 A max, 50/60 Hz

Network

• Ethernet interface, 10 Mb / 100 Mb / 1 Gb Ethernet LAN interface

(RJ45). 2

HDMI input

• HDMI version 1.4b, resolutions up to 3840 × 2160 at 30 fps. For computer or external playback devices. You need a High Speed

HDMI 1.4b cable to support the high resolutions and frame rates. We recommend a Cisco qualified presentation cable.

Audio line output

• 3.5 mm mini-jack, 3-pin connector.

USB

• Board 55: Two USB 2.0 type A for maintenance

• Board 70: One USB 2.0 type A for maintenance

• Board 55S, 70S, and 85S: Micro USB for maintenance

• Board 55S, 70S, and 85S: USB-C

Factory reset

• Pinhole for factory reset. If possible, we recommend that you reset the board from the Touch user interface or the web interface.

1 The second generation Webex Board family ( S Series ) has some minor hardware platform optimizations.

2 All models also support Wi-Fi.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

About Ethernet ports

The main network port

The main network port - Network port 1 - is always reserved for the connection to LAN. This applies to all video conferencing devices.

Depending on the device, Network port 1 is marked with the number 1, the network symbol ( ), or both.

Auxiliary network ports

Some video conferencing devices have more than one network port. The additional ports can be used for peripheral devices like cameras, Touch 10, third-party control systems, and more.

A device that is connected to such a network port gets a local IP address from the codec, and therefore is not part of the corporate network. It is not possible for packets to traverse the codec between the main network port (LAN) and the auxiliary network ports (link-local).

• A Cisco peripheral device is assigned a dynamic IP address in the range (DHCP): 169.254.1.41 to 169.254.1.240

• A non-Cisco device is assigned the dynamic IP address

(DHCP): 169.254.1.30

NOTE: Only one non-Cisco device can get a dynamic IP address at a time.

• A non-Cisco device can be assigned a static IP address in the range: 169.254.1.241 to 169.254.1.254

This method can also be used to connect to the codec with SSH.

In this case you can use the IP address 169.254.1.1.

Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Some of the auxiliary network ports provide Power over Ethernet

(PoE). These ports can power peripherals like the Touch 10 controller.

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Product

Room Kit

Room Kit Mini

Room 55

Room 70 / Room 55 Dual

Room 70 G2

Codec Plus

Codec Pro

Boards

SX10

SX20

SX80

MX200 G2 / MX300 G2

MX700 / MX800

DX70 / DX80

Number of auxiliary network ports

1

1

1

2

4

0

2

2

0

0

2

1

4

2

Number of auxiliary network ports with PoE

0

1 ( )

1 ( )

1 ( )

2 ( , PoE)

1 ( )

0

0

0

0 *

0

2 ( , PoE)

0

0

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

* These products have a separate PoE injector that is connected to one of the auxiliary network ports.

The PoE injector is used for the Touch 10 controller.

188 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Mini-jack connector pin-out schemes

3.5 mm mini-jack, 3-pin (line-out)

Ground

Right channel

Peripherals

Left channel

Maintenance Device settings

Audio connectors (mini-jack)

Connector pin out

Line-out

Tip = Left channel

Ring = Right channel

Shield = GND

Signal type

Connector (codec)

Input impedance

Unbalanced

Mini-jack 3.5 mm,

3-conductor

N/A

Output impedance

Maximum input level

Maximum output level

Phantom power

Phantom power resistor pin ”tip”

Phantom power resistor pin ”ring 1”

Frequency response

Signal to Noise Ratio

470 Ohm

N/A

8.2 dBu ±2 dB

N/A

N/A

N/A

20 Hz-20 kHz ±1 dB

-100 dB

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

189 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Serial interface for maintenance for Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S

Use the micro USB connector for direct communication with the device. You need a micro USB to USB cable. If the computer doesn’t auto-install a serial port driver, you need to install a serial port driver on the computer manually 1 .

Use a terminal emulator (SSH client) to connect to the serial interface. For the most common computer types (PC, MAC) and operating systems, PuTTY or Tera Term will work.

The serial connection can be used without an IP-address, DNS, or a network.

Parameters:

• Baud rate: 115200 bps

• Data bits: 8

• Parity: None

• Stop bit: 1

• Hardware flow control: Off

Device settings

Serial communication is enabled by default. Use the following configuration to change the behavior:

SerialPort > Mode

For security reasons, you are asked to sign in before using the serial interface. Use the following setting to change the behavior:

SerialPort > LoginRequired

If your device is provisioned by CUCM, the serial port settings should be configured from CUCM.

Computer

USB

USB to micro USB cable

Micro USB connector

Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S

1. Connect a USB cable from a computer to the micro-USB port on the board.

You will see two USB to Serial Port devices on your computer. The names depend on the operating system of the computer. On Linux, you typically see and

/dev/ttyUSB1

/dev/ttyUSB0

for main.

for the camera

These ports are connected to the native serial interface (UART) on the two CPUs. They show everything printed by the system to this port, including logs from bootloaders.

Micro USB Video conferencing device

2. Sign in with admin credentials when you get the sign-in prompt after bootup is completed.

You can only sign in to the main CPU, not to the camera CPU.

After signing in, you have access to the API of the board.

If your board has been factory reset, the signin is admin with an empty password.

1 You need a CP210x USB to UART Bridge Virtual COM Port (VCP) driver, see

► http://www.silabs.com/products/development-tools/software/usb-to-uartbridge-vcp-drivers

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

190

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Serial interface for maintenance for Webex Board 55 and 70

Board 55 and 70 have a USB-A port that offers some maintenance capabilities. There is no serial connection to the main CPU on these devices. You only get a virtual serial interface on top of USB. This means that your computer can't see the device, unless the device is almost fully operational.

If the computer doesn’t auto-install a serial port driver, you need to install a serial port driver on the computer manually 1 .

Use a terminal emulator (SSH client) to connect to the serial interface. For the most common computer types (PC, MAC) and operating systems, PuTTY or Tera Term will work.

The serial connection can be used without an IP-address, DNS, or a network.

Parameters:

• Baud rate: 115200 bps

• Data bits: 8

• Parity: None

• Stop bit: 1

• Hardware flow control: Off

Device settings

Serial communication is enabled by default. Use the following configuration to change the behavior:

SerialPort > Mode

For security reasons, you are asked to sign in before using the serial interface. Use the following setting to change the behavior:

SerialPort > LoginRequired

If your device is provisioned by CUCM, the serial port settings should be configured from CUCM.

Computer

USB

USB to USB cable

Webex Board 55

1. Connect a USB cable from your computer to the USB-A port on the board. On Webex

Board 55, use the USB port closest to the panel.

2. Power up the board. You will see the virtual serial port on the computer. Its name depends on the operating system of the computer. On

Linux, you typically see

/dev/ttyACM0

.

NOTE: If you power up the board before you connect the computer, the computer can't see the board

Webex Board 70

USB

USB connector

Video conferencing device

3. Sign in with admin credentials when you get the sign-in prompt. After signing in, you have access to the API of the board.

If your board has been factory reset, the signin is admin with an empty password.

1 You need a CP210x USB to UART Bridge Virtual COM Port (VCP) driver, see

► http://www.silabs.com/products/development-tools/software/usb-to-uartbridge-vcp-drivers

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

191

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Open TCP Ports

The web server within the codec prohibit or restrict the use of nonsecure or unnecessary ports, protocols, modules, and/or services. Some ports are open or closed by default.

TCP 22: SSH

You can close the port by setting SSH mode to Off .

NetworkServices SSH Mode: Off / On

TCP 80: HTTP

You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off or HTTPS .

NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off

TCP 443: HTTPS

You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off .

NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off

TCP 4043: Remote pairing software download

You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off .

Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On

TCP 4045: Remote pairing version information

You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off .

Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On

Peripherals Maintenance

TCP 4047: Remote pairing session connection

The port is only available (and open) when a Touch panel is remote paired with the video conferencing device. You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off .

Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On

TCP 4053: Remote pairing port

You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off .

Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On

TCP 5060/5061: SIP listen ports

The SIP listen pors are open by default. The SIP listen ports are disabled by the Cisco UCM (Unified Communication Manager).

You can close the ports by setting the SIP listen ports to Off .

SIP ListenPort: Off / On

Device settings

Administrator Guide

The device settings are configured from the Setup > Configuration page on the web interface. Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the device then sign in.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

192

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

HTTPFeedback address from TMS

When a device is added to Cisco TelePresence Management

Suite (TMS), it is automatically configured to send information

(events) back to TMS. The device receives the address, that these events should be sent to, from TMS (HTTPFeedback address). If this address is absent or misconfigured, the device cannot send events to TMS.

Missing response to events

If the device does not receive a response to an event, it will retry sending it to the HTTPFeedback address up to 6 times at increasing intervals.

If the device does not receive a response to any of the retries, the endpoint tries to send a message to the HTTPFeedback address every ten minutes. The HTTPFeedback status will indicate that it has failed, and there is a diagnostic message indicating the type of failure.

While retrying to send messages, there will be a loss of Call Detail

Records (CDR) on TMS.

Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS

In order to get a new address to send events to, you must restart the device and wait for the next management address push from

TMS (scheduled or triggered by the TMS administrator).

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

193 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Register a device to the Cisco Webex cloud service

You can register a device to Cisco Webex remotely from the web interface instead of using the on-screen setup assistant.

To register a device, you need to create an activation code on

Control Hub first. To learn how to create an activation code, see

►  Create a Place and Add Services for a Cisco Webex Room

Device or a Cisco Webex Board

From the web interface, you can only register a device that is not currently registered to a service.

NOTE: All local users and any customizations that have been created for this device will be deactivated.

1. Sign in to the web interface, and click Click here to register to

Webex on the Home screen.

This link is only available if the device is not registered to a service already.

2. A pop-up appears and you can enter the activation code you have created on Control Hub.

Format:

• xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx , or

• xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

3. After registration, you must setup the time zone and language settings from the on-screen setup assistant. If the wizard times out, default settings will be applied.

Administrator Guide

Limitations

Some of the available configurations only apply to on-premises registered devices.

They don’t apply to Webex registered devices. In the API guide's Supported

Commands Matrix , these items are marked with “On-prem only”.

Among the non-applicable configurations, are those related to H.323, H.320, SIP,

NTP, CUCM, LDAP, Proximity, and Far End

Camera Control.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

194 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Supported RFCs

The RFC (Request for Comments) series contains technical and organizational documents about the Internet, including the technical specifications and policy documents produced by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

CE software supports a range of RFCs, including the following:

• RFC 2782 DNS RR for specifying the location of services

(DNS SRV)

• RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol

• RFC 3263 Locating SIP Servers

• RFC 3361 DHCP Option for SIP Servers

• RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time

Applications

• RFC 3711 The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)

• RFC 4091 The Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT)

Semantics for the Session Description Protocol (SDP)

Grouping Framework

• RFC 4092 Usage of the Session Description Protocol (SDP)

Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT) Semantics in the

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

• RFC 4582 The Binary Floor Control Protocol draft-ietf-bfcpbis-rfc4582bis-00 Revision of the Binary Floor

Control Protocol (BFCP) for use over an unreliable transport

• RFC 4733 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones and

Telephony Signals

• RFC 5245 Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE): A

Protocol for Network Address Translator (NAT) Traversal for

Offer/Answer Protocols

• RFC 5321 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

• RFC 5589: SIP Call Control Transfer

• RFC 5766 Traversal Using Relays around NAT (TURN): Relay

Extensions to Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN)

• RFC 5905 Network Time Protocol Version 4: Protocol and

Algorithms Specification

Administrator Guide

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

195

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

Technical specification

(page 1 of 2)

SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY

• Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software Version 9.8 or later

• RoomOS

COMPONENTS

Fully integrated unit including:

• Multi-touch LED display

Webex Board 55/55S: 55 inch

Webex Board 70/70S: 70 inch

Webex Board 85S: 85 inch

• 4K camera

• 12-microphone array

• Speakers

• Whiteboarding pen

Mounting options:

• Floor stand (freestanding or wall-secured)

• Wall mount

Optional hardware components:

• HDMI presentation cable 8 m / 26.2 ft.

• Pen kit (2 pens and 6 extra tips)

DISPLAY

Webex Board 55/55S:

• Edge LED LCD, 55 inch, 4K, 350 nits, 16:9

• Viewing angle: +/- 89 degrees (all directions)

• Number of colors: 1.07 billion (10 bit)

• Contrast: 1:4000

• Response time: 8 ms

Webex Board 70/70S:

• Edge LED LCD, 70 inch, 4K, 300 nits, 16:9

• Viewing angle: +/- 88 degrees (all directions)

• Number of colors: 1.07 billion (10 bit)

• Contrast: 1:4000

• Response time: 6 ms

Webex Board 85S:

• Direct LED LCD, 85 inch, 4K, 300 nits, 16:9

• Viewing angle: +/- 89 degrees (all directions)

• Number of colors: 1.07 billion (10 bit)

• Contrast: 1:4000

• Response time: 6.5 ms

USER INTERFACE

• Capacitive touch

• Protective glass with optical bonding

• Multi-touch

CAMERA OVERVIEW

• Fixed-focus lens

• 4Kp60

• F-value: 2.8

• 83° horizontal field of view

• 55° vertical field of view

• Camera mounted tilted: -25°

AUDIO SYSTEM

• 12-element microphone array with intelligent voice tracking

• Integrated voice-optimized speakers

AUDIO FEATURES

• High-quality 20-kHz audio

• Acoustic echo cancellation

• Automatic Gain Control (AGC)

• Automatic noise reduction

• Active lip synchronization

• Microphone array with intelligent voice tracking capabilities

BANDWIDTH REQUIREMENTS

• Minimum bandwidth:

720p30 from 768 Kbps

1080p30 from 1.72 Mbps

• Maximum bandwidth:

Transmit: 4.3 Mbps

Receive: 10 Mbps

PRESENTATION CAPABILITIES

• Local presentation up to 4K

• Audio over HDMI

LIVE VIDEO RESOLUTIONS (ENCODE/DECODE)

• Main video:

Up to 1920 × 1080@30 (HD1080p)

• Presentation sharing:

Up to 1920 x 1080@30 (HD1080p)

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

• One HDMI input:

Supports formats up to 4K (3840 × 2160)

Frame rate of 60 fps for up to 1080p and 30 fps for 2160p

Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)

• 3.5-mm mini jack audio out (line out)

• Factory reset pinhole

• Ethernet

Webex Board 55:

• Two USB 3.0 (service)

Webex Board 70:

• One USB 3.0 (service)

Webex Board 55S/70S/85S:

• USB-C (future use)

• USB micro (service)

NETWORK INTERFACES

• One Ethernet (RJ-45) 100/1000 Mbps

• Wi-Fi: 802.11a/b/g/n; 802.11ac (2.4 and 5 GHz)

• Bluetooth ready

• IPv4 DHCP/Static

• IPv6 (static IP address assignment, stateless autoconfiguration, and DHCPv6)

• Network Time Protocol (NTP)

• HTTP Proxy support (for signaling, not media)

• Inspecting TLS Proxy supported

• Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)

• 802.1X network authentication (Passphrase or

X.509 client certificate)

• 802.1Q virtual LAN

• 802.1p (Qos and Class of Service [CoS])

USER CONTROLS

• Control Cisco Webex Board directly from the touchscreen, use the Cisco Webex Teams app, or use a Cisco Touch 10 controller

LANGUAGE SUPPORT

• English, Spanish, German, French, French

Canadian, Portuguese, Japanese, Czech, Danish,

Dutch, Norwegian, Swedish, Latin American

Spanish, Italian, Finnish, Polish, Turkish in CE9.8

• Additional languages may be supported in future software releases

SUPPORTED INFRASTRUCTURE

• Cisco Unified Communications Manager 10.5.2 and newer

• Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server

(Cisco VCS)

• Cisco Webex cloud service (managed through

Control Hub)

ENCRYPTION

• Real-time media (voice, video, and screen sharing) is encrypted using the Secure Real-Time Transport

Protocol (SRTP)

• Eend-to-end encryption uses Advanced Encryption

Standard (AES) 128, AES 256, SHA1, SHA256, and

RSA

OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY

• Ambient temperature: 0°C to 35°C (32°F to 95°F)

• Relative humidity (RH): 10% to 90%

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

196

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

Technical specification

(page 2 of 2)

POWER

• Autosensing power supply

• 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Webex Board 55:

• Power consumption:

Standby: 45 W

Idle or in-use: 185W

Webex Board 55S:

• Power consumption (Max 4.6A):

Standby: 33 W

Idle or in-use: 170W

Webex Board 70:

• Power consumption:

Standby: 55 W

Idle or in-use: 240 W

Webex Board 70S:

• Power consumption (Max 4.6A):

Standby: 33 W

Idle or in-use: 222W

Webex Board 85S:

• Power consumption (Max 4.6A):

Standby: 41 W

Idle or in-use: 352 W

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS

Webex Board 55/55S:

• Width: 1283 mm / 50.5 in.

• Height: 814 mm / 32.1 in.

• Depth: 48.3 / 1.9 in.

• Weight: 39.8 kg / 87.7 lbs

Webex Board 70/70S:

• Width: 1627 mm / 64.1 in.

• Height: 1034 mm / 40.7 in.

• Depth: 61 mm / 2.4 in.

• Weight: 64.3 kg / 141.8 lbs

Webex Board 85S:

• Width: 1966 mm / 77.4 in.

• Height: 1221 mm / 48.1 in.

• Depth: 76 mm / 3 in.

• Weight: 100 kg / 220 lbs

Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

APPROVALS AND COMPLIANCE

Webex Board 55, 70:

• Directive 2014/35/EU (Low-Voltage Directive)

• Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Directive) – Class A

• Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive)

• Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS)

• Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)

• NRTL approved (Product Safety)

• FCC CFR 47 Part 15B (EMC) – Class A

• FCC Listed (Radio Equipment)

Webex Board 55S, 70S, 85S:

• Regulatory compliance:

Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Directive)

Directive 2014/53/EU (Radio Equipment Directive)

Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS)

Directive 2002/96/EU (WEEE)

NRTL approved (product safety)

FCC Listed (radio equipment)

• Standards:

Radio: EN 300 328, EN 301 893, EN 300 440

EMC: EN 301 489-1 and -17, EN 55032 - Class

A, EN 55024

Safety: EN 60950-1, EN 62479, EN 62311 (for the radio versions)

FCC CFR 47 Part 15B (EMC) - Class A

FCC CFR 47 Part 15C (RF)

FCC CFR 47 Part 15E (R)

Please check the Product Approval Status Database at http://www.ciscofax.com for approval documents per country.

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Administrator Guide

197

All specifications are subject to change without notice, system specifics may vary.

All images in these materials are for representational purposes only, actual products may differ.

Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. A listing of Cisco’s trademarks can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company.

June 2019 www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration Peripherals Maintenance Device settings

Administrator Guide

User documentation on the Cisco web site

Use the following short-links to find the documentation for the product series running CE software.

The documents are organized in the following categories - some documents are not available for all products:

Room Series:

►  https://www.cisco.com/go/room-docs

MX Series:

► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs

SX Series:

  https://www.cisco.com/go/sx-docs

DX Series:

►   https://www.cisco.com/go/dx-docs

Boards:

►   https://www.cisco.com/go/board-docs

In general, you can find user documentation for all Cisco

Collaboration endpoints at ► https://www.cisco.com/go/ telepresence/docs

Install and Upgrade > Install and Upgrade Guides

• Installation guides: How to install the product

• Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to get the device up and running

• RCSI guide: Regulatory compliance and safety information

Maintain and Operate > Maintain and Operate Guides

• Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to get the device up and running

• Administrator guide: Information required to administer your product

• Deployment guide for TelePresence endpoints on

CUCM: Tasks to perform to start using the device with the Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM)

• Spare parts overview, Spare parts replacement guides,

Cable schemas : Useful information when replacing spare parts

Maintain and Operate > End-User Guides

• User guides: How to use the product

• Quick reference guides: How to use the product

• Physical interface guide: Details about the codec’s physical interface, including the connector panel and

LEDs

Reference Guides > Command references

• API reference guides: Reference guide for the

Application Programmer Interface (API)

Reference Guides > Technical References

• CAD drawings: 2D CAD drawings with dimensions.

Configure > Configuration Guides

• Customization guide: How to customize the user interface, how to use the device’s API to program in-room controls, making macros, configure advanced audio set-ups using the Audio Console, and other customizations.

Design > Design Guides

• Video conferencing room guidelines: General guidelines for room design and best practice

• Video conferencing room guidelines: Things to do to improve the perceived audio quality

Software Downloads, Release and General Information >

Licensing Information

• Open source documentation: Licenses and notices for open source software used in this product

Software Downloads, Release and General Information >

Release Notes

• Software release notes

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019. www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

198

Cisco Webex Boards

Introduction Configuration

D15429.02 Board Administrator Guide CE9.9, OCTOBER 2019.

Peripherals

Cisco contacts

On our web site you will find an overview of the worldwide Cisco contacts.

Go to: ►

  https://www.cisco.com/go/offices

Corporate Headquarters

Cisco Systems, Inc.

170 West Tasman Dr.

San Jose, CA 95134 USA

199

Maintenance

Administrator Guide

Appendices Device settings

Intellectual property rights

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS

MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS,

INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE

ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION

OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING

PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH

THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU

ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY,

CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright

© 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT

FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH

ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL

WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,

THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR

TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT,

SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT

OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS

SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples, command display output, network topology diagrams, and other figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual

IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.

All printed copies and duplicate soft copies are considered un-Controlled copies and the original on-line version should be referred to for latest version.

Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices.

Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/ or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)

Cisco product security overview

This product contains cryptographic features and is subject to United States and local country laws governing import, export, transfer, and use. Delivery of Cisco cryptographic products does not imply third-party authority to import, export, distribute, or use encryption. Importers, exporters, distributors, and users are responsible for compliance with U.S. and local country laws. By using this product you agree to comply with applicable laws and regulations. If you are unable to comply with U.S. and local laws, return this product immediately.

Further information regarding U.S. export regulations may be found at http://www.bis.doc.gov/policiesandregulations/ear/index.htm.

www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents